WO2022151306A1 - 数据传输的方法和装置 - Google Patents

数据传输的方法和装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022151306A1
WO2022151306A1 PCT/CN2021/072005 CN2021072005W WO2022151306A1 WO 2022151306 A1 WO2022151306 A1 WO 2022151306A1 CN 2021072005 W CN2021072005 W CN 2021072005W WO 2022151306 A1 WO2022151306 A1 WO 2022151306A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
network device
candidate
terminal device
target
information
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2021/072005
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
胡星星
耿婷婷
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to CN202180068156.1A priority Critical patent/CN116250282A/zh
Priority to PCT/CN2021/072005 priority patent/WO2022151306A1/zh
Priority to JP2023543100A priority patent/JP7626494B2/ja
Priority to KR1020237027224A priority patent/KR20230129527A/ko
Priority to EP21918514.7A priority patent/EP4266746A4/en
Publication of WO2022151306A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022151306A1/zh
Priority to US18/352,770 priority patent/US20230362750A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0069—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink
    • H04W36/00695—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink using split of the control plane or user plane
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/34—Reselection control
    • H04W36/36—Reselection control by user or terminal equipment
    • H04W36/362—Conditional handover
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0011—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off for data sessions of end-to-end connection
    • H04W36/0016—Hand-off preparation specially adapted for end-to-end data sessions
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0061—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link of neighbour cell information
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0069—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink
    • H04W36/00692—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink using simultaneous multiple data streams, e.g. cooperative multipoint [CoMP], carrier aggregation [CA] or multiple input multiple output [MIMO]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/02—Buffering or recovering information during reselection ; Modification of the traffic flow during hand-off
    • H04W36/023—Buffering or recovering information during reselection
    • H04W36/0235—Buffering or recovering information during reselection by transmitting sequence numbers, e.g. SN status transfer

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and more particularly, to a method and apparatus for data transmission.
  • the terminal device may, when one of the one or more candidate PSCells satisfies its corresponding condition, Direct access to the candidate PSCell that meets the conditions can shorten the time delay required for adding or changing PSCells.
  • CPAC conditional PSCell addition/change
  • the terminal device accesses the candidate PSCell, it needs to wait for the device before handover to send data packets to the candidate PSCell before sending data to the terminal device, which increases the transmission delay of these data packets.
  • the present application provides a method and apparatus for data transmission, so as to reduce the time delay of data transmission.
  • a method for data transmission is provided, which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit used for a network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • a network device or can also be executed by a chip or circuit used for a network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the following uses The implementation of the network device is taken as an example for description.
  • the method may include: configuring a condition-based addition or change of the candidate primary and secondary cells PSCell for the terminal device; performing early data transmission to the network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs.
  • the network device to which it belongs sends one or more data packets, and the data packets are in the form of protocol data units of the packet data convergence layer protocol; one or more data packets include: the secondary cell group bearer on the secondary cell group terminated by the primary base station MN configured for the terminal device. and/or packets on MN-terminated split bearers configured for the end device.
  • the above method may be performed by a main network device (eg, a master node (master node, MN) (or a main base station)), or may also be performed by a chip or circuit for the main network device.
  • a main network device eg, a master node (master node, MN) (or a main base station)
  • MN master node
  • main base station main base station
  • the early data transmission can also be called early data transfer, or it can also be called by other names, which are not named properly.
  • the protection scope of the application examples is limited.
  • early data transfer can be performed between the primary network device and the candidate network device (such as a candidate secondary node (SN)), so that after the terminal device accesses the candidate network device, the candidate network device can send data to the terminal device. Send the data that has been transferred, thereby reducing the delay of data transmission.
  • the candidate network device such as a candidate secondary node (SN)
  • the MN may also perform early data transmission to the candidate network device, such as through the protocol data unit of the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP).
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • PDU packet data unit
  • the embodiments of the present application can support early data transfer of data packets carried by the MN-terminated secondary cell group and/or MN-terminated split bearers, and can reduce the transmission delay of data in these bearers.
  • the method further includes: sending first indication information to the network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs, where the first indication information is used to indicate the secondary cell group bearer and/or the MN-terminated secondary cell group. or early data transmission for MN-terminated split bearers.
  • the first indication information can be sent through the control plane interface between the primary network device and the candidate network device (eg, the MN and the candidate SN), or through the user plane interface between the primary network device and the candidate network device.
  • the candidate network device eg, the MN and the candidate SN
  • the method further includes: sending second indication information to the network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs, where the second indication information is used to instruct to discard or ignore one or more data packets some or all of the data packets.
  • the primary network device may send second indication information to the candidate network device, indicating that part or all of the data packets of early data transmission are discarded or ignored.
  • the candidate network device can be prevented from being retained in the candidate network device or the candidate network device can repeatedly send some data packets that the terminal device has successfully received to the terminal device, which can reduce the waste of resources.
  • the second indication information includes information of one or more sequence numbers, and the information of one or more sequence numbers is used to indicate that one or more data packets are discarded or ignored some or all of the packets in the .
  • the second indication information may be a serial number.
  • the candidate network device may be instructed to discard or ignore those data packets whose corresponding sequence numbers are lower than the sequence number #A in those previously transferred data packets (eg, PDCP PDUs). That is, if the master network device wants to instruct to discard or ignore the data packets corresponding to the sequence number lower than the sequence number #A, the master network device may indicate the sequence number #A to the candidate network device.
  • the second indication information may be multiple serial numbers, such as in the form of a serial number list.
  • the candidate network device needs to discard or ignore those data packets corresponding to the sequence numbers in the sequence number list in the previously transferred data packets (eg, PDCP PDU). That is, the primary network device can indicate the sequence numbers corresponding to the discarded or ignored packets.
  • the sequence number is a packet data convergence protocol sequence number or a new air interface user plane sequence number.
  • sending the second indication information to the network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs includes: when a preset condition is met, sending the second indication to the network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs information.
  • the preset condition may be a limitation on time (such as periodic transmission), or a limitation on the amount of data (such as a comparison between the amount of data and a threshold value or a threshold range), or may be a limitation in other aspects .
  • a method for data transmission is provided, which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit used for a network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the implementation of the network device is taken as an example for description.
  • the method may include: before the terminal equipment accesses, receiving one or more data packets from the main base station MN, the data packets are in the form of protocol data units of a packet data convergence layer protocol, and the one or more data packets include: for the terminal equipment Data packets on the configured MN-terminated secondary cell group bearer, and/or data packets on the MN-terminated split bearer configured for the terminal device; after the terminal device accesses, send one or more data packets to the terminal device Part or all of the data packets in ; wherein, the terminal device is configured with the addition or change of the candidate primary and secondary cells PSCell based on the condition.
  • the above method may be performed by a candidate network device (eg, a candidate SN), or may also be performed by a chip or circuit for the candidate network device.
  • a candidate network device eg, a candidate SN
  • a chip or circuit for the candidate network device e.g., a chip or circuit for the candidate network device.
  • early data transfer can be performed between the primary network device and the candidate network device, so that after the terminal device accesses the candidate network device, the candidate network device can send the transferred data to the terminal device, thereby reducing data transmission. delay.
  • the MN may also perform early data transmission to the candidate network device, such as early data transfer in the form of PDCP PDUs. Therefore, the embodiments of the present application can support early data transfer of data packets carried by the MN-terminated secondary cell group and/or MN-terminated split bearers, and can reduce the transmission delay of data in these bearers.
  • the second indication information is received, where the second indication information is used to instruct to discard or ignore some or all of the data packets in one or more data packets; Part or all of the one or more data packets include: sending data to the terminal device according to the one or more data packets and the second indication information.
  • the candidate network device can be prevented from repeatedly sending some data packets that have been successfully received by the terminal device to the terminal device, thereby reducing resource waste.
  • the second indication information includes information of one or more sequence numbers, and the information of the one or more sequence numbers is used to indicate that one or more data packets are discarded or ignored some or all of the packets in the .
  • the sequence number is a packet data convergence protocol sequence number or a new air interface user plane sequence number.
  • receiving the second indication information includes: periodically receiving the second indication information.
  • the candidate network device may send data to the terminal device according to the data transferred from the earlier data and the second indication information received most recently.
  • a method for data transmission is provided, and the method can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit used for a network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the following uses The implementation of the network device is taken as an example for description.
  • the method may include: the target network device determines to configure N first network devices for the terminal device, the N first network devices include second network devices, and N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1, wherein when the terminal device is configured from the source network Before the device switches to the target network device, when the second network device belongs to the condition-based candidate primary and secondary cell PSCell configured for the terminal device or the candidate network device in the scenario of changing the candidate network device, the terminal device switches from the source network device to the target network device.
  • the second network device belongs to the candidate network device in the scenario of adding or changing the condition-based candidate PSCell configured for the terminal device, or the second network device belongs to the network device that provides services for the terminal device;
  • the terminal device switches from the source network device to the target network when the second network device belongs to the condition-based candidate primary and secondary cell PSCells configured for the terminal device and the candidate network device is added or changed in the scenario
  • the second network device belongs to the candidate network device in the scenario of adding or changing the condition-based candidate PSCell configured for the terminal device, or the second network device belongs to the network device that provides services for the terminal device;
  • the target network device sends the third Indication information, and the third indication information is used to instruct to use the information related to the terminal device in the second network device.
  • the above method may be performed by a target network device (eg, target MN or target SN), or may also be performed by a chip or circuit for the target network device (eg, target MN or target SN).
  • a target network device eg, target MN or target SN
  • a chip or circuit for the target network device eg, target MN or target SN
  • the terminal device before the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the target network device, it can be understood that before the network device serving the terminal device changes from the source network device to the target network device, or the candidate network device configured for the terminal device changes from the source network device to the target network device. Before the network device becomes the target network device, or before the network device serving the terminal device or the candidate network device configured for the terminal device is changed.
  • the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the target network device
  • the network device providing services for the terminal device changes from the source network device to the target network device
  • the candidate network device configured for the terminal device changes from the source network device to the target network device.
  • the network device becomes the target network device, or after the network device serving the terminal device or the candidate network device configured for the terminal device is changed.
  • the terminal device is determined after the handover.
  • the configured network device includes the network device configured for the terminal device before switching, the previously transferred data can be used to avoid transferring these data packets again, which can reduce the transmission delay of these data packets.
  • sending the third indication information by the target network device includes: the target network device sends the third indication information to the second network device; or, the target network device sends the source network device Send third indication information.
  • the target network device may send third indication information to the second network device, instructing to use or maintain the information related to the terminal device in the second network device, for example, it may include but not limited to: the information of the terminal device in the second network device Context, earlier data transfer by the second network device.
  • the target network device may send third indication information to the source network device.
  • the third indication information may be carried in the handover request response message.
  • the method further includes: the target network device receiving early data transmission information from the second network device of the source network device.
  • the target network device can perform reasonable processing by learning the early data transmission situation of the second network device, for example, the data packets that have been transferred before do not need to be transferred.
  • the early data transmission information of the second network device may include, for example, one or more of the following: which data packets have been transmitted early by the source network device to the candidate second network device, the candidate second network device may discard or Packets for which earlier data transfers are ignored.
  • the target network device may inform the second network device which early data transfer packets may be discarded or ignored.
  • the method further includes: the target network device performs early data transmission with the second network device according to the early data transmission information of the second network device.
  • the method further includes: the target network device sends the identification information of the second network device to the source network device.
  • the method further includes: the target network device receiving information from one or more network devices of the source network device, wherein the one or more network devices include the second network device, one or more network devices are: before the terminal device switches from the source network device to the target network device, the candidate network device in the scenario of adding or changing the condition-based candidate PSCell configured for the terminal device, or providing services for the terminal device
  • the information of one or more network devices includes one or more of the following: identification information of one or more network devices, and identification information of terminal devices in one or more network devices.
  • the target network device can know whether the candidate network devices before and after the handover are the same according to the information of the candidate network devices before the handover. Therefore, when the candidate network devices before and after the handover are the same, the data packets are transferred again in the early data transfer, and the transmission delay of these data packets can be reduced.
  • the information of one or more network devices includes identification information of one or more network devices, and according to the identification information of one or more network devices, determine the Nth A network device includes a second network device.
  • the target network device can decide based on the information. Which network devices are selected to provide services for the terminal device, or the target network device can also decide which candidate network devices to select based on this information, so as to reuse the previously transmitted data as much as possible, reduce the transmission delay, and improve the user experience.
  • the target network device receives information from one or more network devices of the source network device, including: the target network device receives a handover request message, and the handover request message includes a or multiple network devices.
  • the target network device may be notified of the information of the network device (eg, candidate network device) before the handover. Therefore, the target network device can determine whether to determine whether to include the same network device before and after the handover by receiving the handover request message carrying the information of the network device before the handover (eg, candidate network device).
  • the target network device sends the identification information of the terminal device in the second network device to the second network device.
  • the target network device sends an SN addition request message to the second network device, where the SN addition request message includes identification information of the terminal device in the second network device.
  • the method further includes: the target network device sends the information of the N first network devices to the source network device.
  • the target network device sends the identification information of the N first network devices to the source network device.
  • a method for data transmission is provided, which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit used for a network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • a network device or can also be executed by a chip or circuit used for a network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the following uses The implementation of the network device is taken as an example for description.
  • the method may include: the source network device determines that the network device configured for the terminal device after the handover includes a second network device, wherein, before the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the target network device, the second network device belongs to the network device configured for the terminal device.
  • the condition-based candidate primary and secondary cell PSCell is added or the candidate network device in the scenario is changed, after the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the target network device, the second network device belongs to the condition-based candidate PSCell configured for the terminal device.
  • the candidate network device in the changing scenario, or the second network device belongs to the network device that provides services for the terminal device; or, after the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the target network device, the second network device belongs to the configuration for the terminal device.
  • the second network device belongs to the condition-based candidate PSCell configured for the terminal device.
  • the candidate network device in the scenario is added or changed, or the second network device belongs to the network device that provides services for the terminal device; the source network device sends third indication information to the second network device, and the third indication information is used to indicate the use of the second network device.
  • Information related to terminal equipment in network equipment is added or changed, or the second network device belongs to the network device that provides services for the terminal device; the source network device sends third indication information to the second network device, and the third indication information is used to indicate the use of the second network device.
  • the above method may be performed by a source network device (eg, source MN or source SN), or may also be performed by a chip or circuit for source network device (eg, source MN or source SN).
  • a source network device eg, source MN or source SN
  • a chip or circuit for source network device eg, source MN or source SN
  • the source network device receives the handover request response message, and determines, according to the handover request response message, that the network device configured for the terminal device after the handover includes the second network device.
  • the third indication information may be carried in a release request message (eg, an SN release request message).
  • a release request message eg, an SN release request message
  • the source network device determines that the network device configured for the terminal device after the handover includes the second network device, including: the source network device receives the second network device from the target network device. According to the identification information of the second network device, the source network device determines that the network device configured for the terminal device after the handover includes the second network device.
  • the method further includes: the source network device receives information from the N first network devices of the target network device, and the N first network devices are the target network device and the terminal The network device configured by the device.
  • the source network device receives identification information of N first network devices from the target network device.
  • the source network device may determine whether the network device configured for the terminal device after the handover includes the network configured for the terminal device before the handover according to the information of the N first network devices (such as the identification information of the N first network devices). equipment. For example, the source network device may determine, according to information of the N first network devices (eg, identification information of the N first network devices), that the network devices configured for the terminal device after the handover include the second network device.
  • the information of the N first network devices eg, identification information of the N first network devices
  • the method further includes: the source network device sends the early data transmission information of the second network device to the target network device.
  • the method further includes: the source network device sends information of one or more network devices to the target network device, wherein the one or more network devices includes a second network device , one or more network devices are: before the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the target network device, the candidate network device in the scenario where the condition-based candidate PSCell configured for the terminal device is added or changed, or the network device that provides services for the terminal device
  • the information of one or more network devices includes one or more of the following: identification information of one or more network devices, and identification information of terminal devices in one or more network devices.
  • the source network device sends information of one or more network devices to the target network device, including: the source network device sends a handover request message to the target network device, and the handover request message Include information about one or more network devices.
  • the method further includes: the source network device sends the data packet to be sent to the terminal device to the target network device or the second network device.
  • a fifth aspect provides a method for data transmission, which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit used for a network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the implementation of the network device is taken as an example for description.
  • the method may include: the second network device receives third indication information from the source network device or the target network device, where the third indication information is used to instruct to use the information related to the terminal device in the second network device.
  • the terminal device before the terminal device switches from the source network device to the target network device, if the second network device belongs to the candidate network device in the scenario where the condition-based candidate primary and secondary cell PSCells configured for the terminal device are added or changed, the terminal device will switch from the source network device to the target network device.
  • the second network device belongs to the candidate network device in the scenario of adding or changing the condition-based candidate PSCell configured for the terminal device, or the second network device belongs to the network device that provides services for the terminal device ; Or, after the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the target network device, the second network device belongs to the condition-based candidate primary and secondary cell PSCell configured for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device Before switching from the source network device to the target network device, the second network device belongs to the candidate network device in the scenario of adding or changing the condition-based candidate PSCell configured for the terminal device, or the second network device belongs to the network that provides services for the terminal device equipment.
  • the above method may be performed by the second network device, or may also be performed by a chip or circuit used for the second network device.
  • the third indication information may be carried in a release request message (eg, an SN release request message).
  • a release request message eg, an SN release request message
  • the third indication information may be carried in an addition request message (eg, an SN addition request message).
  • an addition request message eg, an SN addition request message
  • the second network device receives identification information of the terminal device at the second network device from the target network device.
  • the second network device receives an SN addition request message from the target network device, where the SN addition request message includes identification information of the terminal device in the second network device.
  • the information related to the terminal device includes one or more of the following: context information of the terminal device, data packets of the terminal device that have been transmitted to the second network device , the information of the data packet of the terminal device that the second network device can discard or ignore.
  • the target network device is a network device in a condition-based candidate PSCell addition or change scenario
  • the source network device is a condition-based candidate PSCell addition or change
  • the network device in the scenario device or, the target network device is a network device in a condition-based candidate PSCell addition or change scenario, and the source network device is a network device in a carrier aggregation scenario; or, the target network device is a network device in a carrier aggregation scenario, and the source network device is a network device in a carrier aggregation scenario.
  • the device is a network device in the scenario of adding or changing candidate PSCells based on conditions.
  • a sixth aspect provides a method for data transmission, which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit used for a network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the implementation of the network device is taken as an example for description.
  • the method may include: receiving information about candidate network devices configured for the terminal device before the terminal device switches from the source network device to the target network device; determining that the network devices configured for the terminal device after the terminal device switches from the source network device to the target network device include: The candidate network device configured for the terminal device before handover; the information of the early data transmission of the candidate network device configured for the terminal device before the terminal device switches from the source network device to the target network device is received.
  • the method may include: receiving information of the second network device;
  • the network device includes a second network device; and early data transmission information of the second network device is received.
  • the above method may be performed by a target network device (eg, target MN or target SN), or may also be performed by a chip or circuit for the target network device (eg, target MN or target SN).
  • a target network device eg, target MN or target SN
  • a chip or circuit for the target network device eg, target MN or target SN
  • the early data transmission information of the candidate network device may include, for example, one or more of the following: which data packets have been transferred early to the candidate network device (such as Through the packet data convergence protocol sequence number (packet data convergence protocol sequence number, PDCP SN) or new radio user plane sequence number (new radio user plane sequence number, NR-US SN) to indicate), which network devices can be discarded or ignored by candidate network devices Packets for early data transfers.
  • packet data convergence protocol sequence number packet data convergence protocol sequence number
  • NR-US SN new radio user plane sequence number
  • the method further includes: receiving third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the use of candidate network devices configured for the terminal device before handover related to the terminal device information.
  • the information related to the terminal device includes one or more of the following: context information of the terminal device, switching to the terminal device from the source network device to the target network device The data packets of the terminal device transmitted by the candidate network device configured for the terminal device before the switch, the data packets of the terminal device that can be discarded or ignored by the candidate network device configured for the terminal device before the terminal device switches from the source network device to the target network device. information.
  • the method further includes: receiving second indication information, where the second indication information is used to instruct to discard or ignore some or all data packets of early data transmission.
  • the second indication information includes information of one or more sequence numbers, and the information of the one or more sequence numbers is used to indicate that parts of early data transmissions are discarded or ignored or All packets.
  • the sequence number is a packet data convergence protocol sequence number or a new air interface user plane sequence number.
  • early data transmission is performed to the network device configured for the terminal device after the switch according to the early data transmission situation with the candidate network device configured for the terminal device before the switch. .
  • a seventh aspect provides a method for data transmission, which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit used for a network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the implementation of the network device is taken as an example for description.
  • the method may include: sending information of candidate network devices configured for the terminal device before the terminal device switches from the source network device to the target network device; determining that the network devices configured for the terminal device after the terminal device switches from the source network device to the target network device include: The candidate network device configured for the terminal device before handover; the early data transmission information of the candidate network device configured for the terminal device before the terminal device switches from the source network device to the target network device is sent.
  • the above method may be performed by a source network device (such as a source MN or a source SN), or may also be performed by a chip or circuit for a source network device (such as a source MN or a source SN).
  • a source network device such as a source MN or a source SN
  • a chip or circuit for a source network device such as a source MN or a source SN
  • the early data transmission information of the candidate network device may include, for example, one or more of the following: which data packets have been transferred early to the candidate network device (such as Indicated by the PDCP SN or NR-U sequence number), which early data transfer packets can be discarded or ignored by the candidate network device.
  • the method further includes: sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to be configured before switching from the source network device to the target network device using the terminal device information related to the terminal device in the candidate network device.
  • the information related to the terminal device includes one or more of the following: context information of the terminal device, switching to the terminal device from the source network device to the target network device Information about the data packets of the terminal device transmitted by the candidate network device previously configured for the terminal device, and the data packets of the terminal device that can be discarded or ignored by the candidate network device configured for the terminal device before the terminal device switches from the source network device to the target network device.
  • the method further includes: sending second indication information, where the second indication information is used to instruct to discard or ignore some or all data packets of early data transmission.
  • the sequence number is a packet data convergence protocol sequence number or a new air interface user plane sequence number.
  • the target network device according to the early data transmission situation between the terminal device and the candidate network device configured for the terminal device before switching from the source network device to the target network device, to the target network device Do early data transfers.
  • a data transmission method is provided, which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit used for a network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the implementation of the network device is taken as an example for description.
  • the method may include: receiving information of network devices configured for the terminal device before the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the target network device; determining the candidate network devices configured for the terminal device after the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the target network device includes: The network device configured for the terminal device before switching; the early data transmission information of the network device configured for the terminal device before the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the target network device is received.
  • the method may include: receiving information of the second network device; determining that the terminal device switches from the source network device After reaching the target network device, the candidate network devices configured for the terminal device include the second network device; and early data transmission information of the second network device is received.
  • the above method may be performed by a target network device (eg, target MN or target SN), or may also be performed by a chip or circuit for the target network device (eg, target MN or target SN).
  • a target network device eg, target MN or target SN
  • a chip or circuit for the target network device eg, target MN or target SN
  • a ninth aspect provides a method for data transmission, which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit used for a network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the implementation of the network device is taken as an example for description.
  • the method may include: sending information of network devices configured for the terminal device before the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the target network device; determining the candidate network devices configured for the terminal device after the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the target network device includes: The network device configured for the terminal device before the handover; the early data transmission information of the network device configured for the terminal device before the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the target network device is sent.
  • the method may include: sending information of the second network device; determining that the terminal device switches from the source network device
  • the candidate network device configured for the terminal device after the target network device includes the second network device; the early data transmission information of the second network device is sent.
  • the above method may be performed by a source network device (eg, source MN or source SN), or may also be performed by a chip or circuit for source network device (eg, source MN or source SN).
  • a source network device eg, source MN or source SN
  • a chip or circuit for source network device eg, source MN or source SN
  • a communication apparatus configured to execute the methods provided in the above-mentioned first to ninth aspects.
  • the apparatus may include units and/or modules for performing the methods provided in the first to ninth aspects, such as a processing unit and/or a communication unit.
  • the apparatus is a chip, a system of chips, or a circuit used in a network device.
  • the communication unit may be an input/output interface, interface circuit, output circuit, input circuit, pin or Related circuits, etc.
  • the processing unit may be a processor, a processing circuit, a logic circuit, or the like.
  • the above transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the above-mentioned input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a communication device comprising: a memory for storing a program; a processor for executing a program stored in the memory, and when the program stored in the memory is executed, the processor is used for executing the above-mentioned first aspect to the method provided by the ninth aspect.
  • the apparatus is a terminal device or a network device.
  • the apparatus is a chip, a chip system or a circuit used in terminal equipment or network equipment.
  • the present application provides a processor for executing the methods provided by the above aspects.
  • the process of sending the above-mentioned information and obtaining/receiving the above-mentioned information in the above-mentioned methods can be understood as the process of outputting the above-mentioned information by the processor and the process of receiving the above-mentioned input information by the processor.
  • the processor When outputting the above-mentioned information, the processor outputs the above-mentioned information to the transceiver for transmission by the transceiver. After the above-mentioned information is output by the processor, other processing may be required before reaching the transceiver.
  • the transceiver acquires/receives the above-mentioned information, and inputs it into the processor. Furthermore, after the transceiver receives the above-mentioned information, the above-mentioned information may need to be processed in other ways before being input to the processor.
  • obtaining the information of the second network device before handover mentioned in the foregoing method can be understood as the processor receiving the input information.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a processor specially used to execute these methods, or may be a processor that executes computer instructions in a memory to execute these methods, such as a general-purpose processor.
  • the above-mentioned memory can be a non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as a read-only memory (Read Only Memory, ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be set on different chips respectively.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • the embodiment does not limit the type of the memory and the setting manner of the memory and the processor.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program codes for device execution, the program codes including methods for performing the above-mentioned first to ninth aspects.
  • a fourteenth aspect provides a computer program product containing instructions, which, when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the methods provided in the first to ninth aspects above.
  • a fifteenth aspect provides a chip, the chip includes a processor and a communication interface, the processor reads an instruction stored in a memory through the communication interface, and executes the methods provided in the first to ninth aspects.
  • the chip may further include a memory, in which instructions are stored, the processor is configured to execute the instructions stored in the memory, and when the instructions are executed, the The processor is configured to execute the methods provided in the first to ninth aspects above.
  • a sixteenth aspect provides a communication system, including the primary network device and the candidate network device described above.
  • a seventeenth aspect provides a communication system, comprising the above-mentioned source network device and target network device; or, source network device and second network device; or, target network device and second network device; or, source network device and second network device A network device, a target network device, and a second network device.
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of the architecture of CU and DU.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 200 suitable for an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 300 suitable for an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of a DC control plane architecture suitable for an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 5 shows a schematic diagram of the protocol stack for MCG bearer, SCG bearer and split bearer on the network side in EN-DC.
  • Figure 6 shows a schematic diagram of the protocol stack for MCG bearer, SCG bearer and split bearer on the network side in NGEN-DC/NE-DC/NR-DC.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a data transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a data transmission method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a CPA process applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a MN-triggered CPC process applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an SN-triggered CPC process applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a scenario in which a CPAC is configured before handover and an MN handover occurs afterward, which is applicable to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic flow chart of a scenario in which CPC is configured before handover and SN handover occurs after another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flow chart applicable to a scenario in which a CPAC is not configured before handover and a MN handover occurs after another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic block diagram of an apparatus for data transmission provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is another schematic block diagram of an apparatus for data transmission provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, for example, fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) systems or new radio (NR), long term evolution (LTE) systems, LTE frequency Division duplex (frequency division duplex, FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD) and so on.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • LTE frequency Division duplex frequency division duplex
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • the technical solutions provided in this application can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth generation mobile communication system.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to device to device (D2D) communication, vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine to machine (M2M) communication, machine Machine type communication (MTC), and Internet of things (IoT) communication systems or other communication systems.
  • D2D device to device
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • M2M machine to machine
  • MTC machine
  • the terminal equipment in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as user equipment (user equipment, UE), access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station (mobile station, MS), mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT) ), remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user equipment.
  • the terminal device in this embodiment of the present application may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, and may be used to connect people, objects, and machines, such as a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and the like.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a notebook computer, a handheld computer, a mobile internet device (mobile internet device, MID), a wearable device, a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, intelligent Wireless terminals in the power grid (smart grid), wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, etc.
  • the UE may be used to act as a base station.
  • a UE may act as a scheduling entity that provides sidelink signals between UEs in V2X or D2D or the like.
  • cell phones and automobiles communicate with each other using sidelink signals. Communication between cell phones and smart home devices without relaying communication signals through base stations.
  • the network device in this embodiment of the present application may be a device for communicating with a terminal device, and the network device may also be referred to as an access network device or a wireless access network device, for example, the network device may be a base station.
  • the network device in this embodiment of the present application may refer to a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) node (or device) that accesses the terminal device to the wireless network.
  • radio access network radio access network, RAN node (or device) that accesses the terminal device to the wireless network.
  • the base station can broadly cover the following names, or be replaced with the following names, such as: Node B (NodeB), evolved NodeB (eNB), next generation NodeB (gNB), relay station, Access point, transmitting and receiving point (TRP), transmitting point (TP), primary station MeNB, secondary station SeNB, multi-standard wireless (MSR) node, home base station, network controller, access node , wireless node, access point (AP), transmission node, transceiver node, baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), active antenna unit (AAU), radio head (RRH), central unit , CU), distributed unit (distributed unit, DU), positioning node, etc.
  • NodeB Node B
  • eNB evolved NodeB
  • gNB next generation NodeB
  • TRP transmitting and receiving point
  • TP transmitting point
  • primary station MeNB secondary station SeNB
  • MSR multi-standard wireless
  • MSR multi-standard wireless
  • home base station network controller
  • access node wireless
  • a base station may be a macro base station, a micro base station, a relay node, a donor node, or the like, or a combination thereof.
  • a base station may also refer to a communication module, modem or chip for provision in the aforementioned equipment or apparatus.
  • the base station can also be a mobile switching center and a base station in Device-to-Device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X), and machine-to-machine (M2M) communications.
  • D2D Device-to-Device
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • M2M machine-to-machine
  • Functional devices network-side devices in 6G networks, devices that undertake base station functions in future communication systems, etc.
  • Base stations can support networks of the same or different access technologies. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device.
  • Base stations can be fixed or mobile.
  • a helicopter or drone can be configured to act as a mobile base station, and one or more cells can move according to the location of the mobile base station.
  • a helicopter or drone may be configured to function as a device that communicates with another base station.
  • the network device in this embodiment of the present application may refer to a CU or a DU, or the network device includes a CU and a DU.
  • the gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU).
  • AAU active antenna unit
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a CU and DU architecture.
  • the CU implements some functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some functions of the gNB.
  • the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implementing functions of the radio resource control (RRC) layer and the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implementing the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer, and physical (PHY) layer.
  • AAU implements some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, therefore, in this architecture, the higher-layer signaling, such as the RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU. , or, sent by DU+AAU.
  • the network device may be a device including one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node.
  • the CU can be divided into network devices in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network devices in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
  • the CU can also be divided into a central unit-control plane (CU-CP) of the control plane and a central unit-user plane (CU-UP) of the user plane.
  • CU-CP and CU-UP can also be deployed on different physical devices
  • CU-CP is responsible for control plane functions, mainly including RRC layer and PDCP-C layer.
  • the PDCP-C layer is mainly responsible for encryption and decryption of control plane data, integrity protection, and data transmission.
  • the CU-UP is responsible for user plane functions, mainly including the service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer and the PDCP-U layer.
  • SDAP layer is mainly responsible for processing the data of the core network and mapping the flow to the bearer.
  • the PDCP-U layer is mainly responsible for at least one function of data plane encryption and decryption, integrity protection, header compression, serial number maintenance, and data transmission.
  • the CU-CP and the CU-UP are connected through a communication interface (eg, an E1 interface).
  • CU-CP represents that network equipment is connected to core network equipment through a communication interface (eg, Ng interface), and is connected to DU through a communication interface (eg, F1-C (control plane) interface).
  • the CU-UP is connected to the DU through a communication interface (eg, F1-U (user plane) interface).
  • the PDCP-C layer is also included in the CU-UP.
  • the network device mentioned in the embodiments of this application may be a device including a CU, or a DU, or a device including a CU and a DU, or a control plane CU node (CU-CP node), a user plane CU node (CU-UP node), and a DU Node's device.
  • CU-CP node control plane CU node
  • CU-UP node user plane CU node
  • DU Node's device a device including a CU, or a DU, or a control plane CU node (CU-CP node), a user plane CU node (CU-UP node), and a DU Node's device.
  • Network equipment and terminal equipment can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or vehicle; can also be deployed on water; can also be deployed in the air on aircraft, balloons and satellites.
  • the scenarios in which the network device and the terminal device are located are not limited.
  • the core network device refers to a device in a core network (core network, CN) that provides service support for terminal devices.
  • core network core network
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • SMF session management function
  • UPF user plane function
  • the AMF entity may be responsible for the access management and mobility management of the terminal equipment.
  • the SMF entity can be responsible for session management, such as session establishment of terminal devices.
  • the UPF entity may be a functional entity of the user plane, and is mainly responsible for connecting to the external network.
  • entities in this application may also be referred to as network elements or functional entities, for example, AMF entities may also be referred to as AMF network elements or AMF functional entities; for example, SMF entities may also be referred to as SMF network elements or SMF functions entity etc.
  • the wireless communication system 200 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 210 shown in FIG. 2 , and the wireless communication system 200 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 220 shown in FIG. 2 .
  • Both the network device and the terminal device can be configured with multiple antennas, and the network device and the terminal device can communicate using the multi-antenna technology.
  • the network device when the network device communicates with the terminal device, the network device can manage one or more cells, and there can be an integer number of terminal devices in one cell.
  • the network device 210 and the terminal device 220 form a single-cell communication system, and without loss of generality, the cell is denoted as cell #1.
  • the network device 210 may be a network device in cell #1, or in other words, the network device 210 may serve a terminal device (eg, terminal device 220) in cell #1.
  • a cell can be understood as an area within the coverage range of a wireless signal of a network device.
  • FIG. 2 is only a simplified schematic diagram for easy understanding, and the wireless communication system 200 may also include other network devices or other terminal devices, which are not shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the method provided in this application can also be applied to a dual connectivity (DC) scenario.
  • the terminal device is taken as the UE and the network device as the base station as an example, and the DC scenario is introduced with reference to FIG. 3 .
  • a UE may communicate with multiple base stations, that is, dual connectivity (DC), also known as multi-radio dual connectivity (MR-DC), which is unified, and is represented by DC below.
  • DC dual connectivity
  • MR-DC multi-radio dual connectivity
  • These multiple base stations may be base stations belonging to the same radio access technology (RAT) (such as all 4G base stations, or all 5G base stations), or may be base stations of different RATs (such as one is the fourth generation 4G base station) base station, one is the fifth generation 5G base station).
  • RAT radio access technology
  • FIG. 3 shows another schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 300 suitable for use in embodiments of the present application.
  • the UE 320 can communicate with the base station 311 and the base station 312 through the DC technology, and the base station 311 and the base station 312 jointly access the core network 330.
  • the core network 330 may be a 4G core network or a 5G core network.
  • the network side can use the resources of multiple base stations to provide communication services for the UE, thereby providing high-speed transmission for the UE.
  • the base station that has control plane signaling interaction with the core network is called the master node (master node, MN), and other base stations are called secondary nodes (secondary node, SN).
  • MN master node
  • SN secondary node
  • the MN may also be referred to as the primary base station in some cases
  • the SN may also be referred to as the secondary base station in some cases.
  • Each base station has different RLC entities and MAC entities.
  • data radio bearer can be divided into the following three types: master cell group bearer (MCG bearer), secondary cell group bearer (SCG bearer), split Bearer (split bearer).
  • MCG bearer refers to the RLC entity and MAC entity of the DRB on the primary base station
  • SCG bearer refers to the RLC entity and MAC entity of the DRB on the secondary base station
  • split bearer refers to the RLC and MAC entities of the DRB It is available on both the primary base station and the secondary base station.
  • MN terminated bearer For the bearer that PDCP terminates on the MN, it can be called the MN terminated bearer (MN terminated bearer), that is, the downlink (DL) data directly reaches the MN from the core network, and then passes through the PDCP/SDAP of the MN.
  • the RLC/MAC of the MN or SN is sent to the UE, and uplink (uplink, UL) data is processed from the PDCP/SDAP of the MN and sent to the core network.
  • the bearer that PDCP terminates on the SN it can be called the SN terminated bearer, that is, the DL data directly reaches the SN from the core network, and is processed by the PDCP/SDAP of the SN and then sent through the RLC/MAC of the MN or SN.
  • the UL data is processed from the PDCP/SDAP of the SN and sent to the core network. It can be understood that in some cases, such as when the terminal device is connected to the 5G core network, there is a protocol layer SDAP.
  • both the primary base station and the secondary base station have RRC entities, and both can generate RRC messages (ie, control messages, such as measurement messages, etc.).
  • RRC messages ie, control messages, such as measurement messages, etc.
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of a DC control plane architecture applicable to this embodiment of the present application.
  • Communication between the primary base station and the core network is through a communication interface (eg, NG-C interface), between the primary base station and the secondary base station through a communication interface (eg, Xn-C interface), and between the primary base station and the UE through a communication interface ( For example, Uu interface) communication, communication between the secondary base station and the UE through a communication interface (for example, Uu interface).
  • the secondary base station may directly send the RRC message generated by the secondary base station to the UE.
  • the RRC message sent by the UE to the secondary base station is also directly sent to the secondary base station.
  • the RRC message directly exchanged between the secondary base station and the UE is called signaling radio bearer 3 (signalling radio bearer, SRB3).
  • the secondary base station may notify the primary base station of the generated RRC message, and the primary base station then sends it to the UE.
  • the UE forwards the RRC message to the secondary base station to the secondary base station through the primary base station.
  • the user plane of the secondary base station may be connected to the core network connected to the primary base station, that is, the core network can directly send data to the UE through the secondary base station.
  • Evolved Universal Ground-Based Radio Access and New Radio Dual Connectivity Evolved Universal Ground-Based Radio Access and New Radio Dual Connectivity
  • EN-DC Evolved Universal Ground-Based Radio Access and New Radio Dual Connectivity
  • NG-RAN E-UTRA-NR dual connectivity NGEN-DC
  • New Radio and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Dual Connectivity NR-E-UTRA dual connectivity, NE-DC
  • New Radio and New Radio Dual Connectivity NR-NR dual connectivity, NR-DC.
  • the primary base station is an LTE base station (eg, eNB) connected to the 4G core network
  • the secondary base station is an NR base station (eg, gNB).
  • the primary base station is an LTE base station connected to the 5G core network
  • the secondary base station is an NR base station.
  • the primary base station is an NR base station connected to the 5G core network
  • the secondary base station is an LTE base station.
  • EN-DC is sometimes referred to as NSA because UEs in EN-DC networks cannot camp on NR cells at the beginning of 5G.
  • An NR base station capable of camping on a UE is also sometimes referred to as a SA NR base station.
  • the primary base station is the NR base station connected to the 5G core network
  • the secondary base station is the NR base station.
  • Fig. 5 shows the schematic diagram of the protocol stack for MCG bearer, SCG bearer and split bearer on the network side in EN-DC.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of the protocol stack for MCG bearer, SCG bearer and split bearer on the network side in NGEN-DC/NE-DC/NR-DC.
  • the transmission of each bearer needs to go through RLC/MAC and PDCP/SDAP.
  • a UE can simultaneously receive services from multiple cells under one base station.
  • the serving cell group provided by the MN for the UE may be called a master cell group (master cell group, MCG), and the MCG includes one or more cells (cells).
  • the serving cell group provided by the SN for the UE may be called a secondary cell group (secondary cell group, SCG), and the SCG includes one or more cells.
  • MCG master cell group
  • SCG secondary cell group
  • the SCG includes one or more cells.
  • the cells other than the SpCell may be called secondary cells (secondary cell, SCell).
  • SCell secondary cell
  • the SCell and SpCell in the MCG or SCG can perform carrier aggregation to jointly provide transmission resources for the UE.
  • the application scenarios of the present application are not limited to the above-mentioned DC scenarios, and the present application is also applicable to DC scenarios of other systems, such as DC scenarios composed of 5G base stations and WIFI, or base stations deployed as licensed spectrum and base stations deployed as unlicensed spectrum.
  • DC scenarios composed of 5G base stations and WIFI or base stations deployed as licensed spectrum and base stations deployed as unlicensed spectrum.
  • the composed DC scene
  • CA Carrier aggregation
  • PCell a cell deployed at a primary frequency point (or, in other words, a cell operating on a primary carrier).
  • a PCell is a cell corresponding to a terminal device initiating an initial connection establishment process or a connection re-establishment process, that is, when a terminal device initiates an initial connection establishment process or a connection re-establishment process in a certain cell, the cell is called a PCell.
  • one cell may be indicated as PCell.
  • the primary and secondary cells PSCell the terminal equipment performs random access or initial physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmission in the SCG (for example, when the SCG change is performed and the random access process is not required, the UE initiates the initial PUSCH transmission), or a cell in the SCG cell where the terminal device performs random access during the reconfiguration process of synchronization.
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • Secondary cell SCell a cell working on a secondary carrier. Once the RRC connection is established, the SCell may be configured to provide additional radio resources. In a dual connectivity system, all cells in the MCG and SCG except PCell and PSCell can be called SCell.
  • PSCell is also referred to as SCell in some places, that is, SCell also includes PSCell.
  • Serving cell a terminal device in the RRC connection (RRC_CONNECTED) state, if carrier aggregation or dual connectivity is not configured, there is only one serving cell, namely PCell; if carrier aggregation or dual connectivity is configured, the The serving cell of the terminal equipment can be considered to be composed of PCell, PSCell and all SCells.
  • each carrier corresponds to an independent cell.
  • a terminal device configured with carrier aggregation or dual connectivity can be connected to one PCell and at most 31 SCells.
  • the PCell, PSCell and all SCells of the terminal device constitute the set of serving cells of the terminal device.
  • the serving cell of the terminal device may refer to PCell, PSCell, or SCell.
  • the network side will trigger the change of the PSCell (that is, the network side notifies the terminal device to switch from one PSCell to another PSCell, and notify the corresponding configuration information of the PSCell after the change). For example, based on the measurement result of the terminal device, the network side obtains that the signal quality of one PSCell becomes worse, and the signal quality of another PSCell becomes better, so the network side notifies the terminal device to change the PSCell.
  • the PSCell change may be the handover of the terminal equipment from a cell of one SN to a cell of another SN, or the handover of the terminal equipment from a cell of one SN to another cell of the SN.
  • the change of the PSCell may be triggered by the MN, that is, determined (or initiated) by the MN to switch from one PSCell to another PSCell, or it may be triggered by the SN, that is, determined by the SN (or initiated). Initiate) switch from one PSCell to another PSCell.
  • a conditional PSCell addition or change (conditional PSCell addition/change, CPAC) method is: the network side configures a plurality of candidate PSCells in advance, notifies the terminal equipment of the configuration of the plurality of candidate PSCells and the corresponding conditions of each candidate PSCell, and subsequently When the terminal device determines that there is a candidate PSCell that satisfies its corresponding condition, the terminal device can directly access the candidate PSCell that satisfies the condition. In this way, the network side does not need to wait for the terminal device to report the measurement report before delivering a new PSCell configuration to the terminal device, which can shorten the time delay required for adding or changing the PSCell.
  • CPAC described in this application is a general term, and in this application, CPAC may refer to the addition of conditions and/or the change of the configuration of PSCells based on conditions.
  • the terminal device can directly access the candidate PSCell that satisfies the condition according to the existence of the candidate PSCell that satisfies its corresponding condition, the delay required for adding or changing the PSCell can be shortened.
  • the candidate PSCell cannot send data to the terminal device immediately. It needs to wait for the device before the terminal device accesses the candidate PSCell to send the data packet to the candidate PSCell before sending data to the terminal device. Increases the transmission delay of these packets.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a solution, which can shorten the delay of data transmission.
  • the handover process mainly includes a process related to the CPAC, such as adding a PSCell or changing a PSCell.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a method 700 for data transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Method 700 may include the following steps.
  • the primary network device performs a condition-based process of adding or changing candidate PSCells with the candidate network device.
  • the primary network device may be, for example, an MN
  • the candidate network device and the secondary network device may be, for example, an SN.
  • the primary access network device or the secondary access network may trigger the addition or change of the condition-based candidate PSCell configured for the terminal device. That is, the primary access network device or the secondary access network triggers the candidate network device to configure multiple candidate PSCells in advance, and then the primary access network device can notify the terminal device of the configuration of the multiple candidate PSCells and the trigger corresponding to each candidate PSCell Condition, when the terminal device determines that there is a candidate PSCell that satisfies its corresponding triggering condition, the terminal device can directly access the candidate PSCell that satisfies the condition, and when there are multiple candidate PSCells that satisfy its corresponding triggering condition, the terminal device Which candidate PSCell satisfies the conditions to be accessed can be designed accordingly based on the needs of the system. For example, the terminal device can decide by itself, select any one, or select the one that has been accessed before, which is not limited here.
  • FIG. 7 is mainly for the convenience of understanding, taking the main network device and one candidate network device as an example for description, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of candidate network devices. For example, a larger number of candidate network devices may be included in practice.
  • the primary network device sends one or more data packets to the candidate network device, the one or more data packets include: data packets on the MN-terminated SCG bearer configured for the terminal device, and/or, configured for the terminal device. Packets on the split bearer terminated by the MN.
  • the primary network device may send one or more data packets, that is, one or more downlink data packets, to the network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs.
  • the network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs that is, the candidate network device, may be, for example, the candidate SN.
  • the primary network device performs early data transmission to the network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs.
  • Early data transmission refers to sending the one or more data packets to the network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs before the terminal device accesses the candidate PSCell.
  • the form of the one or more data packets sent by the master network device to the candidate network device may be a protocol data unit (protocol data unit, PDU) (PDCP PDU) of a packet data convergence layer protocol.
  • PDU protocol data unit
  • the main network device can transmit the data packets on the SCG bearer terminated by the MN to the candidate network device early data transmission, and the main network device can also transmit the data packets on the split bearer terminated by the MN to the candidate network device early data transmission.
  • the data packet on the SCG bearer terminated by the MN means that the RLC entity and the MAC entity of the DRB corresponding to the data packet are on the SN, and the PDCP entity is on the MN.
  • the data packet on the split bearer terminated by the MN means that the RLC entity and MAC entity of the DRB corresponding to the data packet are both on the SN and on the MN, and the PDCP entity is on the MN. That is to say, in the early data transmission, the data packets on the SCG bearer terminated by the MN or the split bearer terminated by the MN are processed by the PDCP/SDAP of the MN.
  • this embodiment of the present application does not limit whether the candidate network device (eg, candidate SN) deploys the PDCP layer or supports the function of the PDCP layer.
  • candidate network device eg, candidate SN
  • early data transmission may also be referred to as early data transfer, or may be other names, and the naming does not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of this application.
  • the data transfer between the primary network device or the secondary network device and the candidate network device in the CPAC is recorded as early data transfer.
  • method 700 may further include step 730 .
  • the candidate network device After the terminal device accesses the candidate network device, the candidate network device sends some or all of the one or more data packets to the terminal device.
  • the candidate network device can send the transferred data to the terminal device, thereby reducing the delay of data transmission.
  • early data transfer can be performed between the primary network device and the candidate network device (such as the MN and the candidate SN), so that after the terminal device accesses the candidate network device, the candidate network device can send a message to the terminal device that has been transferred. data, thereby reducing the delay of data transmission.
  • the primary network device may also perform early data transfer to the candidate network device, such as early data transfer in the form of PDCP PDUs. Therefore, the embodiments of the present application can support the early data transfer of the data packets of the MN-terminated SCG bearer and/or the MN-terminated split bearer, and can reduce the transmission delay of data in these bearers.
  • the primary network device may also send indication information #1 to the candidate network device (ie, the network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs), indicating to discard or ignore some or all of the one or more data packets.
  • the MN may send indication information #1 to the candidate SN, indicating that part or all of the data packets of the early data transfer are discarded or ignored.
  • the candidate network device can send data to the terminal device according to the data transferred from the early data and the indication information #1.
  • the candidate network device may send some of the one or more data packets to the terminal device.
  • the candidate network device may discard the data packets indicated to be discarded, or may directly ignore these data packets.
  • the primary network device or the secondary network device will continue to send data to the terminal device, so that between sending the CPAC configuration to the terminal device and the terminal device accessing the candidate PSCell, the primary network device or the secondary network device will continue to send data to the terminal device.
  • the secondary network device may have successfully sent some data packets to the terminal device.
  • the candidate network device re-sends these data packets successfully sent to the terminal device to the terminal device.
  • the primary network device or The secondary network device will notify the candidate network device to discard or ignore some data packets that have been successfully sent to the terminal device.
  • the candidate network device can be prevented from being retained in the candidate network device or the candidate network device can repeatedly send some data packets that the terminal device has successfully received to the terminal device, which can reduce the waste of resources.
  • indication information #1 is used to indicate information used to instruct to discard or ignore part or all of the data packets of the early data transfer.
  • the transmission timing of the instruction information #1 is not limited.
  • the indication information #1 may be sent when a preset condition is satisfied.
  • the preset condition may be a limitation on time (such as periodic transmission), or a limitation on the amount of data (such as a comparison between the amount of data and a threshold value or a threshold range), or may be a limitation in other aspects .
  • the format of the instruction information #1 is not limited.
  • the indication information #1 may be in the form of one or more sequence numbers (SN).
  • SN sequence numbers
  • the serial number is mentioned many times, and the specific form of the serial number is not limited.
  • the sequence number may be the packet data convergence protocol sequence number (PDCP SN), or may be the new radio user plane sequence number (NR-US SN), or It can be other serial numbers, which is not limited. This will not be explained below.
  • the transmission method of the instruction information #1 is also not limited.
  • the indication information #1 can be sent through the user plane between the primary network device and the candidate network device, or it can be sent through the control plane between the primary network device and the candidate network device (for example, the primary network device sends a message to the candidate network device.
  • the primary network device carries indication information #1 in the early status transfer message).
  • the indication information #1 being sent through the user plane between the primary network device and the candidate network device as an example.
  • the data sent by the primary network device to the candidate network device through the user plane carries the sequence number corresponding to the data packet that needs to be discarded or ignored, such as a PDCP SN, indicating to discard or ignore all data packets before the sequence number, including the The data packet corresponding to the sequence number.
  • the number of data packets, each block corresponds to some consecutive data packets corresponding to PDCP SN.
  • the specific content of the indication information #1 will be described in detail below with reference to the method 900 shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the primary network device may also send indication information #2 to the candidate network device (that is, the network device where the PSCell is located), where the indication information #2 is used to indicate the early stage of the MN-terminated SCG bearer and/or the MN-terminated split bearer. data transmission.
  • the MN may send indication information #2 to the candidate SN, indicating early data transmission of the MN-terminated SCG bearer and/or the MN-terminated split bearer.
  • early data transmission of the MN-terminated SCG bearer and/or the MN-terminated split bearer may be performed with the candidate network device.
  • indication information #2 is used to indicate the early data transmission of the MN-terminated SCG bearer and/or the MN-terminated split bearer.
  • the indication information #2 may be sent through the control plane interface of the primary network device and the candidate network device, or may be sent through the user plane interface between the primary network device and the candidate network device, which is not limited.
  • the instruction may be an instruction through the specific content in the instruction information #2, or it may be an action instruction by sending the instruction information #2, which is not limited.
  • the action indication by sending the indication information #2 as an example, as an example and not a limitation, a certain field can be pre-agreed or pre-configured. When this field is sent, the SCG bearer for MN termination and/or the split bearer for MN termination is described. early data transfer.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a method 800 for data transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Method 800 may include the following steps.
  • the target network device determines to configure N first network devices for the terminal device, where the N first network devices include second network devices.
  • N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1.
  • the target network device is used to represent the network device after the handover
  • the source network device is used to represent the network device before the handover
  • the network device may be, for example, MN, SN, etc.
  • the network device may be, for example, MN, SN, etc.
  • the target network device determines to configure N first network devices for the terminal device, where the N first network devices may include: network devices providing services for the terminal device and/or candidate network devices. After the handover, if the N first network devices include a second network device, after the handover, the second network device may be a network device that provides services for the terminal device, or may be a candidate network device.
  • before switching means before the terminal equipment is switched from the source network equipment to the target network equipment, that is, before the network equipment providing services for the terminal equipment changes from the source network equipment to the target network equipment, or before the terminal equipment is switched from the source network equipment to the target network equipment.
  • the configured candidate network device is changed from the source network device to the target network device, or before the network device serving the terminal device or the candidate network device configured for the terminal device is changed.
  • the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the target network device, that is, after the network device that provides services for the terminal device changes from the source network device to the target network device, or the candidate network device configured for the terminal device.
  • After changing from the source network device to the target network device, or after the network device serving the terminal device or the candidate network device configured for the terminal device is changed.
  • the second network device after the handover belongs to the candidate network device in the scenario of adding or changing the condition-based candidate primary and secondary cells PSCell configured for the terminal device.
  • conditional PSCell addition CPA
  • conditional primary secondary cell group cell CPC
  • the target network device decides to configure the candidate network device and the network device before the handover (for example, the network device that serves the terminal device before the handover, or the candidate network device that is configured for the terminal device before the handover) part or all the same. That is to say, the candidate network device that the target network device decides to configure includes the network device configured for the terminal device before the handover, that is, the second network device.
  • the second network device may be a network device that provides services for the terminal device before the handover, for example, the second network device belongs to a network device in the DC scenario before the handover, such as a secondary network device; or the second network device is also a network device before the handover. It may be a candidate network device configured for the terminal device, for example, the second network device belongs to the network device in the CPA/CPC scenario before the handover.
  • the second network device before the handover belongs to the candidate network device in the scenario of adding or changing the condition-based candidate primary and secondary cells PSCell configured for the terminal device.
  • the second network device belongs to the candidate network device configured for the terminal device.
  • the second network device may be a candidate network device, or may be a network device that provides services for the terminal device.
  • the candidate network device that the target network device decides to configure is partially or totally the same as the candidate network device configured for the terminal device before the handover. That is to say, the candidate network device that the target network device decides to configure includes the candidate network device configured for the terminal device before the handover, that is, the second network device.
  • the target network device decides to configure the network device (such as the secondary network device) and some or all of the candidate network devices configured for the terminal device before the handover are the same. That is to say, the network device that the target network device decides to configure includes the candidate network device configured for the terminal device before the handover, that is, the second network device.
  • the second network device belongs to the candidate network device in the scenario of adding or changing the condition-based candidate primary and secondary cells PSCell configured for the terminal device.
  • the second network device belongs to the candidate network device configured for the terminal device.
  • the candidate network device that the target network device decides to configure is partially or totally the same as the candidate network device configured for the terminal device before the handover.
  • the N first network devices include multiple second network devices, that is, the target network device may decide to keep the multiple second network devices configured for the terminal device before handover.
  • the target network device determines that the N first network devices configured for the terminal device include the network device configured for the terminal device before the handover, the data transferred in the previous early data transfer can be used, or it can be reduced Unnecessary data transfers.
  • the target network device may send indication information, such as indication information #3, to instruct to use or maintain the information related to the terminal device in the second network device.
  • the information related to the terminal device in the second network device may include, for example, one or more of the following: the context of the terminal device in the second network device, the data packets of the terminal device that have been transmitted to the second network device, The second network device may discard or ignore information about the data packet.
  • the data packets that can be discarded by the second network device are the data packets that can be discarded in the data packets of the previous early data transfer in the second network device.
  • the indication information #3 may be used to instruct to maintain the context of the terminal device in the second network device.
  • the indication information #3 may be used to indicate the use or maintenance of the early data transfer information of the second network device.
  • the information on the early data transfer of the second network device includes: the data packets of the early data transfer in the second network device (that is, the data packets of the terminal device that have been transmitted to the second network device), and/or, the second network device Information about packets that can be dropped or ignored.
  • indication information #3 is used to indicate the information related to the terminal device in some network devices configured for the terminal device before the handover is indicated to be used or maintained. As for how to indicate specifically, it may be indicated by specific content in the indication information #3, or may be indicated by an action of sending the indication information #3, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the specific content in the indication information #3 may indicate to use or maintain information related to the terminal device in some network devices configured for the terminal device before handover.
  • the function of the protocol predefined indication information #3 is to use or maintain information related to the terminal device in some network devices configured for the terminal device before handover.
  • a 1-bit field may be used to indicate that the terminal device-related information in some network devices configured for the terminal device before handover is used or maintained.
  • 0 corresponds to the information related to the terminal device in some network devices that are configured for the terminal device before the handover is used or maintained
  • 1 corresponds to the information related to the terminal device in some network devices that do not need to be used or maintained for the terminal device before the handover. information, or release information related to the terminal device in some network devices configured for the terminal device before handover.
  • a 1-bit field may be used to indicate whether the indication information #3 is used to indicate whether the context of the terminal device in the second network device is maintained, or the information for indicating to use or maintain the early data transfer of the second network device.
  • 0 corresponds to the indication information #3 for indicating to maintain the context of the terminal device in the second network device
  • 1 corresponds to the indication information #3 for indicating to use or maintain the information of the early data transfer of the second network device.
  • the action of sending the instruction information #3 may instruct to use or maintain information related to the terminal device in some network devices configured for the terminal device before handover.
  • it can be designed to indicate the use or maintenance of information related to the terminal device in some network devices that were configured for the terminal device before handover.
  • Method 800 may include step 8201 or step 8202.
  • the target network device sends indication information #3 to the second network device.
  • the target network device sends indication information #3 to the second network device.
  • the second network device may, according to the indication information #3, determine that it is not necessary to release the data packets transferred in the previous early data transfer.
  • the second network device uses the information related to the terminal device, that is, it can indicate that the second network device keeps or retains the data packets transferred in the previous early data transfer.
  • the second network device can determine which data packets to keep or keep, or which data packets to send to the terminal device according to the data packets transferred in the early data transfer and the indication information #1.
  • the target network device sends indication information #3 to the source network device.
  • the target network device sends indication information #3 to the source network device.
  • the source network device can determine that the second network device does not need to release the data packets transferred in the earlier data transfer. For example, the source network device may continue to transfer the data packet to the second network device, and subsequently the second network device may send the transferred data packet to the terminal device.
  • the source network device may also send indication information #1 to the second network device, that is, to instruct to discard or ignore some or all of the data packets.
  • the source network device may also forward the indication information #3 to the second network device.
  • the second network device may determine that the second network device does not need to release the data packets transferred in the earlier data transfer.
  • the indication information #3 sent by the source network device to the second network device may be the same as or different from the indication information #3 received by the source network device from the target network device, which is not limited. In an example, the indication information #3 sent by the source network device to the second network device is different from the indication information #3 received by the source network device from the target network device.
  • the indication information #3 from the target network device received by the source network device is used to indicate the use or maintenance of the early data transfer information of the second network device
  • the indication information #3 sent by the source network device to the second network device is used to indicate The context of the terminal device in the second network device is maintained.
  • the indication information #3 sent by the source network device to the second network device is the same as the indication information #3 received by the source network device from the target network device.
  • the indication information #3 from the target network device received by the source network device is used to indicate the use or maintenance of the early data transfer information of the second network device, and the indication information #3 sent by the source network device to the second network device is also used for Information indicating early data transfer using or maintaining the second network device.
  • the data transferred in the previous early data transfer can be used, thereby avoiding the need for these data transfer in the early data transfer.
  • the data packets are transferred again, which can reduce the transmission delay of these data packets.
  • method 800 may further include step 830 .
  • the source network device determines that the network device configured for the terminal device after the handover includes the second network device.
  • the target network device sends the identification information of the second network device to the source network device, and the source network device determines, according to the identification information of the second network device, that the network device configured for the terminal device after the handover includes the second network device, or Said network device that is determined to keep or retain packets of earlier data transfers. Simple and accurate through the use of logos.
  • the N first network devices after handover include multiple candidate network devices before the handover (ie, multiple second network devices), by means of indicating and identifying , using fewer resources.
  • the source network device sends a handover request message to the target network device
  • the target network device sends a handover request response message to the source network device
  • the handover request response message carries the identification information of the second network device.
  • the identification information and indication information #3 of the second network device may be carried in the same signaling.
  • the following example introduces a solution in which the identification information of the second network device and the indication information #3 are carried in the same signaling.
  • the source network device receives a signaling sent by the target network device, and the signaling includes indication information #3 and the identifier of the second network device , the indication information #3 is used to indicate the use of information related to the terminal device in the second network device.
  • the source network device determines that the network device configured for the terminal device after the handover includes the second network device.
  • the signaling may further include indication information indicating whether the second network device configured by the target network device for the terminal device is a candidate network device or a secondary network device.
  • the source network device receives a signaling sent by the target network device, and the signaling includes indication information #3 and multiple second network devices.
  • the identifier of the network device, and the indication information #3 is used to indicate the use of information related to the terminal device among the plurality of second network devices.
  • the source network device determines that the network devices configured for the terminal device after the handover include the multiple second network devices.
  • the signaling may further include indication information indicating whether the second network device configured by the target network device for the terminal device is a candidate network device or a secondary network device.
  • the source network device receives multiple signaling sent by the target network device, and each signaling includes an indication #3 and a The identifier of the second network device, and the indication information #3 is used to indicate to use the information related to the terminal device in the second network device.
  • the source network device determines that the network devices configured for the terminal device after the handover include the plurality of second network devices.
  • each signaling may further include indication information indicating whether the second network device configured by the target network device for the terminal device is a candidate network device or a secondary network device.
  • the target network device may send the identification information of the N first network devices to the source network device, and the source network device determines, according to the identification information of the N first network devices, whether the network devices configured for the terminal device after the handover include the network devices before the handover. network equipment.
  • the target network device may receive information related to the terminal device in the second network device.
  • method 800 may further include step 840 .
  • the target network device may receive information of early data transfer from the source network device.
  • the target network device can determine the information according to the information of the early data transfer, such as the data packets of the earlier data transfer and transfer in the second network device and/or the data packets that the second network device can discard or ignore. Which data packets to be sent to the terminal device are subsequently transferred to the second network device.
  • the target network device can also notify the second network device which data packets of early data transfer can be discarded, for example, the target network device can also send indication information #1 to the second network device.
  • the target network device may also learn the information of the network device configured for the terminal device before the handover.
  • the information of the second network device configured for the terminal device before switching may include, for example, identification information of the second network device, and/or identification information of the terminal device on the second network device.
  • the information of the network device configured for the terminal device before the handover for example, can be carried in the handover request message, that is, the source network device sends a handover request message to the target network device, and the handover request message can include the configuration of the terminal device before the handover.
  • Information about network devices can be carried in the handover request message, that is, the source network device sends a handover request message to the target network device, and the handover request message can include the configuration of the terminal device before the handover.
  • the target network device can also judge whether the configured N first network devices include the network device configured for the terminal device before the handover according to the identification information of the network device configured for the terminal device before the handover. For example, the target network device can know whether the network devices before and after the handover are the same according to the identification of the network device.
  • the target network device learns the information of the network devices configured for the terminal device before the handover, it can decide which network devices to select to provide services for the terminal device based on the information, or the target network device can also decide which candidates to select based on this information. In this way, the previously transmitted data can be reused as much as possible, reducing the transmission delay and improving the user experience.
  • the target network device may also send the identification information of the terminal device in the second network device to the second network device.
  • the data transmission methods proposed according to the embodiments of the present application are respectively introduced above with reference to FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 .
  • the method 700 and the method 800 may be used alone or in combination, which is not limited.
  • the solution shown in method 700 can be used to perform early data transfer before handover, and the handover can be performed according to the solution shown in method 800 when it is determined to switch network devices.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a conditional PSCell addition (conditional PSCell addition, CPA) process applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 900 is mainly illustrated by taking the interaction among the terminal device, the MN, the candidate SN1, and the candidate SN2 as an example.
  • the method 900 shown in FIG. 9 may include the following steps.
  • conditional PSCell addition process is performed between the MN and the candidate SN.
  • a conditional PSCell addition process (ie, a CPA process) is performed between the MN and the candidate SN1 and the candidate SN2.
  • the MN sends a SN addition request message to each candidate SN.
  • the SN addition request message may carry indication information, which is used to indicate that this SN addition request message is for conditional SN addition.
  • the SN increase request message is used to indicate that the current SN increase request message is for the conditional SN increase.
  • the candidate SN may send a response message of the SN addition request message to the MN, for example, the candidate SN may feed back a SN addition request confirmation message to the MN.
  • the SN addition request confirmation message may carry indication information, which is used to indicate that the current SN addition request confirmation message is a response to the conditional SN addition.
  • the SN addition request confirmation message may further carry the radio configuration information of the corresponding candidate PSCell configured by the candidate SN for the terminal device.
  • step 910 is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • step 910 may refer to the prior art or to a later-appearing manner.
  • one conditional SN addition process may correspond to one candidate PSCell, that is, one SN addition request message and SN addition request confirmation message are directed to one candidate PSCell.
  • one conditional SN addition process may also correspond to multiple candidate PSCells, that is, one SN addition request message and SN addition request confirmation message are directed to multiple candidate PSCells.
  • the MN sends the CPA configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the MN sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, and the RRC reconfiguration message includes CPA configuration information.
  • the CPA configuration information may include one or more of the following: triggering conditions configured by the MN for each candidate PSCell, the candidate SN is the wireless configuration information of the corresponding candidate PSCell configured by the terminal device, when the terminal device accesses each candidate PSCell In the case of PSCell, the MN configures the radio configuration information of the MCG corresponding to each candidate PSCell for the terminal device.
  • the trigger condition is used to indicate that when the candidate PSCell cell satisfies a certain condition, the terminal device can access the candidate PSCell cell.
  • the trigger condition may be that the signal quality of the candidate PSCell satisfies a certain condition, such as the signal quality of the candidate PSCell is better than a certain threshold, or the signal quality of the candidate PSCell is better than that of the PCell by a certain threshold, or the signal quality of the PCell is lower than a certain threshold.
  • a certain condition such as the signal quality of the candidate PSCell is better than a certain threshold, or the signal quality of the candidate PSCell is better than that of the PCell by a certain threshold, or the signal quality of the PCell is lower than a certain threshold.
  • threshold and the signal quality of the candidate PSCell is better than a certain threshold, and so on.
  • the terminal device may use the radio configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell. If the CPA configuration includes the radio configuration information of the MCG corresponding to each candidate PSCell configured by the MN for the terminal device, the terminal device simultaneously adopts the radio configuration information of the MCG corresponding to the candidate PSCell.
  • step 920 is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • step 920 may refer to the prior art or to a later-appearing manner.
  • the terminal device determines whether the candidate PSCell satisfies the trigger condition corresponding to the candidate PSCell in the CPA.
  • the terminal device receives the CPA configuration information from the MN, and the terminal device determines whether the trigger condition of the corresponding PSCell is satisfied according to the candidate PSCell and the corresponding trigger condition.
  • step 930 is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • step 930 may refer to the prior art or to a later-appearing manner.
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN, indicating that part or all of the data packets of the early data transfer are discarded or ignored.
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN1, indicating that part or all of the data packets of the early data transfer are discarded or ignored.
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN, where indication information #1 is used to indicate which early data transfers in the MN-terminated SCG bearer and/or the MN-terminated split bearer are discarded or ignored. data pack.
  • indication information #1 is used to indicate information used to instruct to discard or ignore part or all of the data packets of the early data transfer.
  • the MN may perform early data forwarding of the MN-terminated SCG bearer to the candidate SN (eg, candidate SN1).
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN (eg, candidate SN1), indicating which data packets of early data transfer in the MN-terminated SCG bearer are discarded or ignored.
  • the MN may perform early data transfer of the MN-terminated split bearer to the candidate SN (eg, candidate SN1).
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN (eg, candidate SN1), indicating which data packets of early data transfer in the split bearer terminated by the MN are discarded or ignored.
  • early data transfer may also be referred to as early data transmission, or may be referred to as other names, and the naming does not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • This application mainly takes the early data transfer as an example for description.
  • the MN performs the early data transfer of the MN-terminated SCG bearer or the MN-terminated split bearer to the candidate SN.
  • these bearers ie, the MN-terminated SCG bearer or the MN-terminated split bearer
  • MN-terminated Early data transfers can be in the form of PDCP PDUs to send packets to the SN.
  • the MN sends these PDCP PDUs to the candidate SN through the user plane interface between the MN and the candidate SN.
  • the MN sends these data packets to the candidate SN through the general packet radio service (GPRS) user plane tunneling protocol (GPRS tunnelling protocol user plane, GTP-U) protocol.
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • GTP-U general packet radio service
  • the sequence number (SN) corresponding to the data packet can also be carried.
  • a new radio user plane (new radio user plane, NR-U) sequence number corresponding to the data packet may be carried in the extension header of the GTP-U.
  • the MN will assign a continuous NR-U sequence number to each transferred data packet, and by carrying the NR-U sequence number corresponding to the data packet, it can know which data packets have performed early data transfer.
  • the MN may send indication information #1 to the candidate SN based on the current situation of sending data to the terminal device, indicating which of the MN-terminated SCG bearers and/or MN-terminated split bearers to discard or ignore Packets for early data transfer.
  • the transmission timing of the instruction information #1 is not limited.
  • the indication information #1 may be sent when a preset condition is satisfied.
  • the preset condition may be a limitation on time (such as periodic transmission), or a limitation on the amount of data (such as a comparison between the amount of data and a threshold value or a threshold range), or may be a limitation in other aspects .
  • the MN may periodically send the indication information #1.
  • the MN when the amount of downlink data sent by the MN to the terminal device reaches a certain threshold, the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN.
  • the MN after the amount of downlink data sent by the MN to the terminal device is correctly received by the terminal device, the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN.
  • the format of the instruction information #1 is not limited.
  • the indication information #1 may be in the form of one or more serial numbers.
  • the indication information #1 may be a serial number, such as serial number #A.
  • the candidate SN can be instructed to discard those packets (such as PDCP PDUs) that have a lower sequence number than sequence number #A in the previously transferred data packets (such as PDCP PDUs) (or even discard the sequence number #A).
  • a corresponding data packet That is to say, if the MN wants to instruct to discard or ignore the data packet corresponding to the sequence number lower than the sequence number #A (even to indicate that the data packet corresponding to the sequence number #A can be discarded), then the MN can indicate the sequence to the candidate SN No. #A.
  • the candidate SN will not send these data packets (that is, The data packet corresponding to the sequence number lower than the sequence number #A, and even the data packet corresponding to the sequence number #A) is sent to the terminal device.
  • the candidate SN can discard these data packets (that is, the data packets corresponding to the sequence number lower than the sequence number #A, and even the data packets corresponding to the sequence number #A), or can directly ignore these data packets. data pack.
  • the indication information #1 may be in the form of multiple serial numbers, for example, in the form of a serial number list.
  • the candidate SN needs to discard those data packets corresponding to the sequence numbers in the sequence number list in the previously transferred data packets (eg, PDCP PDU). That is, the MN can indicate the sequence numbers corresponding to the discarded or ignored data packets.
  • the candidate SN If the candidate SN has not sent the data packets corresponding to the sequence numbers in the sequence number list to the terminal device, the candidate SN will not send these data packets (that is, the data packets corresponding to the sequence numbers in the sequence number list) to the terminal device .
  • the candidate SN may discard these data packets (that is, the data packets corresponding to the sequence numbers in the sequence number list), or may directly ignore these data packets.
  • the indication information #1 may be a block corresponding to a plurality of data packets, the starting sequence number of the block corresponding to each data packet, and the number of data packets in the block.
  • the data packets corresponding to each block are data packets corresponding to a plurality of consecutive sequence numbers starting with the starting sequence number. For example, carry the number of downlink discarded blocks (DL discard number of blocks), the starting SN (DL discard NR PDCP PDU SN start) of the corresponding data packet (such as NR PDCP PDU) of each block, and the corresponding size of each block ( discarded block size).
  • the candidate SN can be instructed to discard those packets whose sequence numbers correspond to the sequence numbers in these blocks in previously transferred packets (eg, PDCP PDUs). That is, the MN can indicate the sequence numbers corresponding to the discarded or ignored data packets. If the candidate SN has not sent the data packets corresponding to these sequence numbers to the terminal device, the candidate SN will not send these data packets (that is, the data packets corresponding to these sequence numbers) to the terminal device. As an example and not a limitation, the candidate SN may discard these data packets (that is, the data packets corresponding to these sequence numbers), or may directly ignore these data packets.
  • PDCP PDUs previously transferred packets
  • the MN may also indicate to the candidate SN the sequence numbers corresponding to the reserved data packets, and the candidate SN may discard or ignore the data packets other than these data packets (ie, the MN indicates the sequence numbers corresponding to the reserved data packets).
  • the names used to represent the same functions as the indication information #1 are all applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the indication information #1 may also belong to the early data transfer information.
  • the MN may also indicate the DRB corresponding to the indication information #1 to the candidate SN.
  • the information sent by the MN to the candidate SN may carry the DRB list of the SCG bearer terminated by the MN and/or the split bearer terminated by the MN.
  • the DRB list may include the DRB ID of each DRB, and may also include indication information #1 to indicate the candidate Information about downlink transfer packets that the SN can discard.
  • the above information can be sent through the user plane between the MN and the candidate SN (such as carried in the GTP-U protocol), or Sending through the control plane between the MN and the candidate SN (for example, the MN sends a message to the candidate SN, for example, the MN carries the above information in the early status transfer message).
  • all indication information #1 may not need to carry the DRB ID.
  • the MN may also send indication information #2 to the candidate SN, indicating that the MN can or supports the early data transfer of the MN-terminated SCG bearer and split bearer.
  • the MN sends indication information to the candidate SN, indicating that the MN can or supports the early data transfer of one or more of the MN-terminated SCG bearer or split bearer.
  • the indication information #2 may be sent through the control plane interface between the MN and the candidate SN, or may be sent through the user plane interface between the MN and the candidate SN, which is not limited.
  • the MN-terminated SCG bearer refers to the MN-terminated SCG bearer in the CPA configured by the network side for the terminal device.
  • the split bearer terminated by the MN refers to the split bearer terminated by the MN in the CPA configured by the network side for the terminal device.
  • the MN may send the indication information #1 to the candidate SN multiple times. For example, the MN may periodically send indication information #1 to the candidate SN. In this way, the candidate SN can determine to discard or ignore the data packets indicated to be discarded or ignored by the respective indication information #1 according to the received multiple indication information #1. Alternatively, the candidate SN can also determine which data packets to discard or ignore according to the last received indication information #1. If the indication information #1 is a sequence number, such as the above-mentioned sequence number #A, the candidate SN can determine to discard or ignore the data packets corresponding to the sequence number lower than the sequence number #A according to the last received indication information #1.
  • the interaction between the MN and the candidate SN1 is mainly used as an example for illustration, which is not limited thereto.
  • early data transfer may also be performed between the MN and the candidate SN2, and the MN may also send the indication information #1 one or more times to the candidate SN2.
  • the MN can perform early data transfer with the candidate SN that satisfies the condition, and can also send indication information #1 to the candidate SN that satisfies the condition.
  • the terminal device accesses the candidate SN that meets the condition.
  • the terminal device determines that the trigger condition of the candidate PSCell is satisfied, the terminal device accesses the candidate PSCell. For example, the terminal device performs a random access process with the candidate PSCell. As shown in FIG. 9 , assuming that the trigger condition of the candidate PSCell in the candidate SN1 is satisfied, the terminal device accesses the candidate SN1.
  • step 950 is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • step 950 may refer to the prior art or to a later-appearing manner.
  • the candidate SN sends downlink data to the terminal device.
  • the candidate SN can send downlink data to the terminal device.
  • the candidate SN can send downlink data to the terminal device according to the situation of early data transfer.
  • the candidate SN may send downlink data to the terminal device according to the situation of early data transfer and the indication information #1.
  • the candidate SN can send downlink data to the terminal device according to the data transferred in the early data of the MN.
  • the candidate SN can also transfer data according to the early data of the MN and the indication information #1 (such as the most recent Once received indication information #1), send downlink data to the terminal device.
  • the candidate SN will not send the data packets (such as PDCP PDUs) that need to be discarded in the indication information #1 (such as the last received indication information #1) to the terminal device, and the candidate SN can send these data packets that need to be discarded. Drop, or simply ignore these packets that need to be dropped.
  • the MN when the MN learns that the terminal equipment has accessed the candidate SN (for example, the MN receives from the terminal equipment a trigger condition indicating that the terminal equipment has met the candidate PSCell; or after successfully accessing the candidate SN, the candidate SN sends a message to the MN. Send an indication of terminal equipment access), the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN, and the candidate SN sends downlink data to the terminal equipment according to the data transferred from the early data of the MN and the indication information #1.
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN
  • the candidate SN sends downlink data to the terminal equipment according to the data transferred from the early data of the MN and the indication information #1.
  • the MN can send an indication message #1 to the candidate SN, indicating to discard or ignore the MN-terminated SCG bearer. Which early data transfer packets in the SCG bearer and/or the split bearer terminated by the MN (same as the content in step 940).
  • the CPA process is described above with reference to steps 910 - 960 shown in FIG. 9 , and it should be understood that the above steps are only exemplary descriptions, which are not strictly limited.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a conditional PSCell change (conditional PSCell change, CPC) process triggered by an MN applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 1000 is mainly illustrated by taking the interaction among the terminal device, the MN, the candidate SN1, the candidate SN2, and the source SN as an example.
  • the source SN is used to represent the SN that is currently configured for the terminal device. It should be understood that the source SN is named for the distinction, for example, the source SN may also be recorded as the current SN, and the specific naming manner does not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the method 1000 shown in FIG. 10 may include the following steps.
  • a CPC process is performed between the MN and the candidate SN.
  • conditional PSCell change procedure is performed between the MN and the candidate SN.
  • a conditional PSCell change process ie, a CPC process
  • CPC process is performed between the MN and the candidate SN1 and the candidate SN2.
  • the MN sends a SN addition request message to each candidate SN.
  • the SN addition request message may carry indication information, which is used to indicate that the current SN addition request message is for a conditional SN change. Or, for example, regardless of whether the conditional SN is increased or the conditional SN is changed, the SN addition request message is used to indicate that the current SN addition request message is for the conditional SN change.
  • the candidate SN may send a response message of the SN addition request message to the MN, for example, the candidate SN may feed back a SN addition request confirmation message to the MN.
  • the SN addition request confirmation message may carry indication information, which is used to indicate that the current SN addition request confirmation message is a response to the conditional SN change.
  • the SN addition request confirmation message may further carry the radio configuration information of the corresponding candidate PSCell configured by the candidate SN for the terminal device.
  • the radio configuration information of the candidate PSCell configured by the candidate SN for the terminal device is carried in the SN addition request confirmation message in the form of an RRC reconfiguration message configured by the candidate SN for the terminal device.
  • step 1010 is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • step 1010 may refer to the prior art or a manner to appear later.
  • method 1000 may further include step 1001 .
  • the MN can indicate to the source SN that the source SN can perform early data transfer to the bearer terminated by the SN.
  • the MN can send an indication message to the source SN, indicating that the source SN can perform early data transfer to the SN-terminated bearer (here, the SN-terminated bearer is the bearer before the CPC, that is, before the CPC). , these bearers are the bearers terminated by the SN), so that the data packets to be sent to the terminal device in the source SN can be transferred.
  • the MN can send an indication message to the source SN, indicating that the MN has triggered the CPC, so that the source SN can determine whether to perform early data transfer to the SN-terminated bearer, that is, the source SN decides whether to perform the early data transfer to the SN-terminated bearer. transfer.
  • step 1001 is only an example, and is not limited thereto.
  • the source SN may send an indication message to the MN, indicating that early data transfer can be performed for the bearer terminated by the SN.
  • the method 1000 may further include step 1020.
  • the MN sends the CPC configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the MN sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, and the RRC reconfiguration message includes CPC configuration information.
  • the CPC configuration information may include one or more of the following: triggering conditions configured by the MN for each candidate PSCell, the candidate SN is the wireless configuration information of the corresponding candidate PSCell configured by the terminal device, when the terminal device accesses each candidate PSCell In the case of PSCell, the MN configures the radio configuration information of the MCG corresponding to each candidate PSCell for the terminal device.
  • triggering conditions configured by the MN for each candidate PSCell
  • the candidate SN is the wireless configuration information of the corresponding candidate PSCell configured by the terminal device, when the terminal device accesses each candidate PSCell
  • the MN configures the radio configuration information of the MCG corresponding to each candidate PSCell for the terminal device.
  • the trigger condition reference may be made to the description in step 920 above, which will not be repeated this time.
  • the terminal device may use the radio configuration information corresponding to the candidate PSCell. If the CPC configuration includes the radio configuration information of the MCG corresponding to each candidate PSCell configured by the MN for the terminal device, the terminal device simultaneously adopts the radio configuration information of the MCG corresponding to the candidate PSCell.
  • step 1020 is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • step 1020 may refer to the prior art or to a later-appearing manner.
  • the terminal device determines whether the candidate cell satisfies the condition.
  • the terminal device determines whether the candidate PSCell satisfies the triggering condition corresponding to the conditional PSCell change.
  • the terminal device receives the CPC configuration information from the MN, and the terminal device determines whether the triggering condition of the corresponding PSCell is satisfied according to the candidate PSCell and the corresponding triggering condition.
  • step 1030 is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • step 1030 may refer to the prior art or to a later-appearing manner.
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN, indicating that part or all of the data packets of the early data transfer are discarded or ignored.
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN1, indicating that part or all of the data packets of the early data transfer are discarded or ignored.
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN, where indication information #1 is used to indicate which early data transfers in the MN-terminated SCG bearer and/or the MN-terminated split bearer are discarded or ignored. data pack.
  • the MN may perform early data transfer of the MN-terminated SCG bearer to the candidate SN (eg, candidate SN1).
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN (eg, candidate SN1), indicating which data packets of early data transfer in the MN-terminated SCG bearer are discarded or ignored.
  • the MN may perform early data transfer of the MN-terminated split bearer to the candidate SN (eg, candidate SN1).
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN (eg, candidate SN1), indicating which data packets of early data transfer in the split bearer terminated by the MN are discarded or ignored.
  • the source SN can transfer the early data of the data packets to the MN according to step 1001. .
  • the MN can perform early data transfer and indicate which early data transfer data packets in the split bearer terminated by the MN are discarded or ignored as described in step 1040. In this case, the MN may discard or ignore which early data transfer packets in the SN-terminated bearer according to the indication sent by the source SN to the MN.
  • the source SN will send some indication information to the MN, instructing to discard or ignore those early data transfer packets in the bearer terminated by the SN.
  • the specific indication information is similar to the indication information #1, the early data transfer between the source SN and the MN.
  • the data packets can be in the form of PDCP SDUs.
  • the MN may generate indication information #1 for the candidate SN according to the indication of the source SN.
  • the bearers terminated by the MN become the split bearers terminated by the MN or the SCG bearers terminated by the MN, then the MN can generate the indication information #1 by itself.
  • Step 1040 is the same as step 940 in the previous CPA process, and details are not repeated here.
  • the MN-terminated SCG bearer refers to the MN-terminated SCG bearer in the CPC configured by the network side for the terminal device.
  • the MN-terminated split bearer refers to the MN-terminated split bearer in the CPC configured by the network side for the terminal device.
  • These bearers may be SN-terminated MCG/SCG/Split bearers or MN-terminated MCG/SCG/Split bearers before the MN-triggered CPC.
  • the terminal device determines that the trigger condition of the candidate PSCell is satisfied, the terminal device accesses the candidate PSCell. For example, the terminal device performs a random access process with the candidate PSCell. As shown in FIG. 10 , assuming that the trigger condition of the candidate PSCell in the candidate SN1 is satisfied, the terminal device accesses the candidate SN1.
  • Step 1050 is the same as step 950 in the previous CPA process, and details are not repeated here.
  • the candidate SN sends downlink data to the terminal device.
  • the candidate SN can send downlink data to the terminal device.
  • the candidate SN can send downlink data to the terminal device according to the situation of early data transfer.
  • the candidate SN can send downlink data to the terminal device according to the situation of early data transfer and the indication information #1.
  • Step 1060 is the same as step 960 in the previous CPA process, and will not be repeated here.
  • the MN-triggered CPC process is exemplarily described above with reference to steps 1010-1060 shown in FIG. 10 . It should be understood that the above steps are only exemplary descriptions and are not strictly limited. In addition, the size of the sequence numbers of the above processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an SN-triggered CPC process applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 1100 is mainly illustrated by taking the interaction among the terminal device, the MN, the candidate SN1, the candidate SN2, and the source SN as an example.
  • the source SN is used to represent the SN that is currently configured for the terminal device. It should be understood that the source SN is named for the distinction, for example, the source SN may also be recorded as the current SN, and the specific naming manner does not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the method 1100 shown in FIG. 11 may include the following steps.
  • a CPC process is performed between the source SN and the candidate SN.
  • conditional PSCell change process is performed between the source SN and the candidate SN.
  • a conditional PSCell change process ie, a CPC process
  • MN MN
  • candidate SN2 the candidate SN2
  • source SN the conditional PSCell change process
  • the source SN sends a SN change required message to the MN.
  • the SN change required message may carry indication information, which is used to indicate that the current SN change required message is for a conditional SN change.
  • the SN change need message can carry the identifier of the candidate SN.
  • the MN sends a SN addition request message to the candidate SN.
  • the SN addition request message may carry indication information, which is used to indicate that the current SN addition request message is for a conditional SN change. Or, for example, regardless of whether the conditional SN is increased or the conditional SN is changed, the SN addition request message is used to indicate that the current SN addition request message is for the conditional SN change.
  • the candidate SN may send a response message of the SN addition request message to the MN, for example, the candidate SN may feed back a SN addition request confirmation message to the MN.
  • the SN addition request confirmation message may carry indication information, which is used to indicate that the current SN addition request confirmation message is a response to the conditional SN change.
  • the SN addition request confirmation message may further carry the radio configuration information of the corresponding candidate PSCell configured by the candidate SN for the terminal device.
  • the radio configuration information of the candidate PSCell configured by the candidate SN for the terminal device may be carried in the SN addition request confirmation message in the form of an RRC reconfiguration message configured by the candidate SN for the terminal device.
  • step 1110 is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • step 1110 may refer to the prior art or to a later-appearing manner.
  • method 1100 may further include step 1101 .
  • the MN can indicate to the source SN that the source SN can perform early data transfer to the bearer terminated by the SN.
  • the MN can send an indication message to the source SN, indicating that the source SN can perform early data transfer to the SN-terminated bearer (here, the SN-terminated bearer is the bearer before the CPC, that is, before the CPC). , these bearers are the bearers terminated by the SN), so that the data packets to be sent to the terminal device in the source SN can be transferred.
  • the MN can send an indication message to the source SN, indicating that the MN has triggered the CPC, so that the source SN can determine whether to perform early data transfer to the SN-terminated bearer, that is, the source SN decides whether to perform the early data transfer to the SN-terminated bearer. transfer.
  • step 1101 is only an example, and is not limited thereto.
  • the source SN may send an indication message to the MN, indicating that early data transfer can be performed for the bearer terminated by the SN.
  • method 1100 may further include step 1120.
  • the MN sends the CPC configuration information to the terminal device.
  • Step 1120 is the same as step 1020 in the previous MN-triggered CPC, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device determines whether the candidate cell satisfies the condition.
  • the terminal device determines whether the candidate PSCell satisfies the triggering condition corresponding to the conditional PSCell change.
  • Step 1130 is the same as step 1030 in the previous MN-triggered CPC, and will not be repeated here.
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN, indicating that part or all of the data packets of the early data transfer are discarded or ignored.
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN
  • the indication information #1 is used to indicate which early data transfers in the MN-terminated SCG bearer and/or the MN-terminated split bearer are discarded or ignored. data pack.
  • the MN may perform early data transfer of the MN-terminated SCG bearer to the candidate SN (eg, candidate SN1).
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN (eg, candidate SN1), indicating which data packets of early data transfer in the MN-terminated SCG bearer are discarded or ignored.
  • the MN may perform early data transfer of the MN-terminated split bearer to the candidate SN (eg, candidate SN1).
  • the MN sends indication information #1 to the candidate SN (eg, candidate SN1), indicating which data packets of early data transfer in the split bearer terminated by the MN are discarded or ignored.
  • the bearers terminated by the SN before the CPC during the CPC process, these bearers become the split bearers terminated by the MN or the SCG bearers terminated by the MN, and the source SN will transfer the early data of the data packets to the MN according to step 1101. .
  • the MN can then perform early data transfer and indicate which early data transfer packets in the split bearer terminated by the MN are discarded or ignored as described in step 1140. In this case, the MN may discard or ignore which early data transfer packets in the SN-terminated bearer according to the indication sent by the source SN to the MN.
  • the source SN will send some indication information to the MN, instructing to discard or ignore those early data transfer packets in the bearer terminated by the SN.
  • the specific indication information is similar to the indication information #1, the early data transfer between the source SN and the MN.
  • the data packets can be in the form of PDCP SDUs.
  • the MN may generate indication information #1 for the candidate SN according to the indication of the source SN.
  • the bearers terminated by the MN become the split bearers terminated by the MN or the SCG bearers terminated by the MN, then the MN can generate the indication information #1 by itself.
  • Step 1140 is the same as step 1040 in the previous MN-triggered CPC, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device accesses a candidate SN that satisfies the condition.
  • the terminal device determines that the trigger condition of the candidate PSCell is satisfied, the terminal device accesses the candidate PSCell. For example, the terminal device performs a random access process with the candidate PSCell. As shown in FIG. 11 , assuming that the trigger condition of the candidate PSCell in the candidate SN1 is satisfied, the terminal device accesses the candidate SN1.
  • Step 1150 is the same as step 1050 in the previous MN-triggered CPC, and details are not repeated here.
  • the candidate SN sends downlink data to the terminal device.
  • Step 1160 is the same as step 1060 in the previous MN-triggered CPC, and details are not repeated here.
  • the SN-triggered CPC process is described above with reference to steps 1110 to 1160 shown in FIG. 11 , and it should be understood that the above steps are only exemplary descriptions, which are not strictly limited.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation to the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the MN can perform early data transfer to the SN.
  • the MN can also send indication information #1 to the SN, indicating which data packets of early data transfer are discarded or ignored. Therefore, after the terminal device accesses the candidate PSCell, the candidate PSCell can send the downlink data of these bearers to the terminal device, thereby reducing the transmission delay of the downlink data in these bearers.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a scenario in which CPAC is configured before handover and MN handover occurs after the handover, which is applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 1200 is mainly illustrated by taking the interaction among the terminal device, the source MN, the candidate SN1, the candidate SN2, and the target MN as an example.
  • the source MN is used to represent the MN before the handover
  • the target MN is used to represent the MN after the handover.
  • the method 1200 shown in FIG. 12 may include the following steps.
  • the network side configures the CPAC for the terminal device.
  • Step 1210 may refer to the prior art or a method that will appear later, and will not be described here.
  • the source MN sends a handover request message to the target MN.
  • the source MN decides to switch the terminal device to the target MN, and the source MN sends a handover request message to the target MN.
  • the handover request message may include one or more of the following: the identifier of the candidate SN, and the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN.
  • the identifier of the candidate SN of the terminal device can be, for example, in the control plane interface established between the MN and the candidate SN for the terminal device, and the candidate SN is the identifier allocated by the terminal device, such as XnAP ID or X2AP ID.
  • the above information (ie, the identifier of the selected SN, and the identifier of the terminal device at the candidate SN) may be referred to as the context reference information of the terminal device at the candidate SN. It should be noted that the information is for each candidate SN, that is, the handover request message carries the above information of the terminal device in each candidate SN.
  • the above description is exemplified by taking the context reference information of the candidate SN carried by the terminal device in the handover request message as an example, which is not limited thereto.
  • the context reference information of the terminal device in the candidate SN can also be sent to the target MN separately.
  • the target MN sends an SN addition request message to the SN.
  • the target MN can send an SN addition request message to the candidate SN1 and the candidate SN2.
  • Scenario 1 CPA before switching and CPA after switching.
  • the target MN decides to configure CPA for the terminal equipment.
  • the target MN sends a SN setup request message to the candidate SN, which carries the information about the location of the terminal device before the handover.
  • the identifier of the candidate SN is the same as the candidate SN before the handover, that is, the target MN decides to keep one or some candidate SNs.
  • the target MN can know whether the candidate SNs before and after the handover are the same according to the identifier of the candidate SN sent by the source MN (eg, the identifier of the candidate SN carried in the handover request message sent by the source MN).
  • the identifier of the candidate SN sent by the source MN eg, the identifier of the candidate SN carried in the handover request message sent by the source MN.
  • the target MN may make judgments respectively.
  • Scenario 2 CPA before the switch and DC after the switch.
  • the target MN decides to configure a DC for the terminal device, that is, configure a SN for the terminal device (this time it is not called a candidate SN, for example, it may be called an SN or a target SN).
  • the target MN decides that the configured SN is the same as the candidate SN before handover, that is, the target MN decides to use a certain candidate SN as the configured SN
  • the target MN sends an SN setup request message to the SN, which carries the information about the candidate SN before handover.
  • the ID of the SN is the same as the candidate SN before handover, that is, the target MN decides to use a certain candidate SN as the configured SN.
  • the target MN can know whether the SNs before and after the handover are the same according to the identifier of the candidate SN sent by the source MN (eg, the identifier of the candidate SN carried in the handover request message sent by the source MN).
  • the target MN can make judgments respectively.
  • Scenario 3 CPC before switching and CPC after switching.
  • the target MN decides to configure MN-triggered CPC for the terminal device.
  • the target MN sends a SN setup request message to the candidate SN, which carries the information about the location of the terminal device before the handover.
  • the identifier of the candidate SN is the same as the candidate SN before the handover, that is, the target MN decides to keep one or some candidate SNs.
  • the target MN can know whether the candidate SNs before and after the handover are the same according to the identifier of the candidate SN sent by the source MN (eg, the identifier of the candidate SN carried in the handover request message sent by the source MN).
  • the identifier of the candidate SN sent by the source MN eg, the identifier of the candidate SN carried in the handover request message sent by the source MN.
  • the target MN may make judgments respectively.
  • the target MN sends a SN establishment request message to the target SN after handover (that is, the SN that triggers the CPC after handover).
  • the SN establishment request message may carry the identifier of the candidate SN before handover.
  • the SN establishment request message may also carry Identification of the terminal device at each candidate SN (one or more candidate SNs).
  • the SN triggers the CPC. If the candidate SN determined by the target SN is the same as the candidate SN before the handover, there may be the following two situations.
  • the target SN obtains the identification of the terminal equipment in each candidate SN (one or more candidate SNs) from the target MN, taking one candidate SN among the candidate SNs as an example, the target SN sends the candidate SN that the terminal equipment is in The identifier of the candidate SN.
  • the target SN directly sends the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN to the candidate SN; or the target MN can send the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN to the candidate SN (for example, the target SN sends to the target MN first, and then the target MN sends to the candidate SN).
  • candidate SN transmission for example, the target SN sends to the target MN first, and then the target MN sends to the candidate SN.
  • the target SN does not obtain the identification of the terminal equipment in each candidate SN (one or more candidate SNs) from the target MN, taking one candidate SN in each candidate SN as an example, the target SN sends a message to the target MN.
  • the identifier of the candidate SN the target MN obtains the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN before handover according to the identifier of the candidate SN, and the target MN sends the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN to the candidate SN.
  • the target MN may make judgments respectively.
  • the target MN decides to configure MN-triggered CPC for the terminal device.
  • the target MN sends an SN setup request message to the candidate SN, which carries the information about the candidate SNs in the candidate SN before handover.
  • the ID of the SN is the same as the candidate SN before handover, that is, the target MN decides to keep one or some candidate SNs.
  • the target MN can know whether the candidate SNs before and after the handover are the same according to the identifier of the candidate SN sent by the source MN (eg, the identifier of the candidate SN carried in the handover request message sent by the source MN).
  • the identifier of the candidate SN sent by the source MN eg, the identifier of the candidate SN carried in the handover request message sent by the source MN.
  • the target MN may make judgments respectively.
  • the target MN sends a SN establishment request message to the target SN after handover (that is, the SN that triggers the CPC after handover).
  • the SN establishment request message may carry the identifier of the candidate SN before handover.
  • the SN establishment request message may also carry Identification of the terminal device at each candidate SN (one or more candidate SNs).
  • the SN triggers the CPC. If the candidate SN determined by the target SN is the same as the candidate SN before the handover, there may be the following two situations.
  • the target SN obtains the identification of the terminal equipment in each candidate SN (one or more candidate SNs) from the target MN, taking one candidate SN among the candidate SNs as an example, the target SN sends the candidate SN that the terminal equipment is in The identifier of the candidate SN.
  • the target SN directly sends the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN to the candidate SN; or the target MN can send the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN to the candidate SN (for example, the target SN sends to the target MN first, and then the target MN sends to the candidate SN).
  • candidate SN transmission for example, the target SN sends to the target MN first, and then the target MN sends to the candidate SN.
  • the target SN does not obtain the identification of the terminal equipment in each candidate SN (one or more candidate SNs) from the target MN, taking one candidate SN in each candidate SN as an example, the target SN sends a message to the target MN.
  • the identifier of the candidate SN the target MN obtains the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN before handover according to the identifier of the candidate SN, and the target MN sends the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN to the candidate SN.
  • the target MN may make a judgment respectively.
  • Scenario 4 CPC before switching, and CPA after switching.
  • the target MN decides to configure CPA for the terminal equipment.
  • the target MN sends an SN setup request message to the candidate SN, which carries the information about the candidate SNs in the candidate SN before handover.
  • the ID of the SN is the same as the candidate SN before handover, that is, the target MN decides to keep one or some candidate SNs.
  • the target MN can know whether the candidate SNs before and after the handover are the same according to the identifier of the candidate SN sent by the source MN (eg, the identifier of the candidate SN carried in the handover request message sent by the source MN).
  • the identifier of the candidate SN sent by the source MN eg, the identifier of the candidate SN carried in the handover request message sent by the source MN.
  • the target MN may make judgments respectively.
  • the above solution can be applied to, for example, a scenario in which the MN triggers the CPC before the handover and the CPA after the handover, or the scenario where the SN triggers the CPC before the handover and the CPA after the handover.
  • Scenario 5 CPC before switching and DC after switching.
  • the target MN decides to configure a DC for the terminal device, that is, configure a SN for the terminal device (this time it is not called a candidate SN, for example, it may be called an SN or a target SN).
  • the target MN decides that the configured SN is the same as the candidate SN before handover, that is, the target MN decides to use a certain candidate SN as the configured SN
  • the target MN sends an SN setup request message to the SN, which carries the information about the candidate SN before handover.
  • the ID of the SN is the same as the candidate SN before handover, that is, the target MN decides to use a certain candidate SN as the configured SN.
  • the target MN can know whether the SNs before and after the handover are the same according to the identifier of the candidate SN sent by the source MN (eg, the identifier of the candidate SN carried in the handover request message sent by the source MN).
  • the target MN can make judgments respectively.
  • the above solution can be applied to the CPC triggered by the MN before the handover, and the scene of the DC after the handover, or can also be applied to the CPC triggered by the SN before the handover, and the scene of the DC after the handover.
  • the target MN sends an SN addition request message to the SN. It should be understood that in different scenarios, it can be adaptively adjusted according to the situation of each scenario.
  • the target MN sends a handover request response message to the source MN.
  • the target MN can also send indication information #3 to the source MN, which is used to instruct to use or maintain the information related to the terminal device in the candidate SN.
  • the information related to the terminal device in the candidate SN may include, for example, one or more of the following: the context of the terminal device in the candidate SN, and the information of the early data transfer performed before the candidate SN.
  • the target MN can also send to the source MN which candidate SNs to retain the context of the terminal device or which candidate SNs to retain the early data transfer performed before, for example, it can be indicated by carrying the identifier of the candidate SN.
  • the indication information #3 or the handover request response message carries the identifiers of one or more candidate SNs.
  • the context of the terminal device in the one or more candidate SNs is instructed to be retained or the one or more candidate SNs are instructed to retain.
  • the indication information #3 may be carried in the handover request response message, or may be sent separately, which is not limited.
  • the source MN sends a SN release request message to the candidate SN.
  • the target MN can send a SN release request message to the candidate SN1 and the candidate SN2.
  • the source MN may also send indication information #3 to the candidate SN, which is used to instruct to use or maintain the information related to the terminal device in the candidate SN.
  • the indication information #3 may be carried in the SN release request message, or may be sent separately, which is not limited.
  • the source MN indicates to the target MN the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN.
  • the source MN sends the target MN the information of the early data transfer of each candidate SN.
  • the information on the early data transfer of the candidate SN may include, for example, one or more of the following: which data packets have been transferred early by the source MN to the candidate SN (for example, indicated by the PDCP SN or NR-U sequence number), the candidate SN Which early data transfer packets can be dropped.
  • the target MN may inform the candidate SN which early data transfer packets may be discarded. It should be understood that early data transfers for SN terminated bearers may be included here.
  • Scenario 1 CPA before switching and CPA after switching.
  • the source MN can send the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN to the target MN.
  • the source MN can transfer the data in the bearer to the target MN.
  • the downlink data packets that have not been correctly received by the terminal equipment are transferred to the target MN, and the uplink data packets received out of sequence from the terminal equipment side are transferred to the target MN.
  • Scenario 2 CPA before the switch and DC after the switch.
  • the source MN does not need to send the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN to the target MN.
  • the source MN can send an indication message #4 to the candidate SN, indicating that the corresponding bearer has been transferred to the candidate SN.
  • the packets are all forwarded to the candidate SN.
  • the indication information #4 may be a user plane indication, such as an end indication end marker.
  • the indication information #4 may also be a control plane indication, that is, the indication information #4 is sent to the candidate SN in the control plane.
  • the candidate SN before handover is the SN after handover.
  • the indication information #4 is used to indicate that all the data packets corresponding to the bearer have been transferred to the candidate SN.
  • the form of the indication it may be indicated by the specific content in the indication information #4, or it may be an action indication by sending the indication information #4, which is not limited.
  • the source MN may directly send the indication information #4 to the candidate SN, or may send the indication information #4 to the candidate SN through the target MN.
  • the candidate SN receives the indication information #4
  • the candidate SN can start to send the new data packet corresponding to the bearer directly received from the core network to the terminal device.
  • the candidate SN can use the early data transfer data packet received from the source MN as the data that needs to be sent to the terminal device after the handover, thereby avoiding the source MN transferring the data packet to the target MN and then sending the data packet by the target MN. Delay brought to SN.
  • the source MN stops data transfer to the candidate SN.
  • the source MN can send the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN to the target MN.
  • the source MN can transfer the data packets corresponding to the bearer received from the core network to the target MN.
  • the source MN can transfer the data packets corresponding to the bearer received from the core network to the target MN, and then the target MN transfers it to the SN.
  • the source MN can transfer the data packets corresponding to the bearer received from the core network to the target MN, and then processed by the target MN (such as from PDCP). SDU becomes PDCP PDU) and sent to SN.
  • the SN before the handover is the SN after the handover.
  • the source MN may continue to transfer some data packets to the candidate SN, and send the remaining data packets to the SN through the target MN.
  • Scenario 3 CPC before switching and CPC after switching.
  • Scenario 3 is similar to Scenario 1 (ie, CPA before handover and CPA after handover).
  • the source MN can transfer the data in the bearer to the target MN.
  • the downlink data packets that have not been correctly received by the terminal equipment are transferred to the target MN, and the uplink data packets received out of sequence from the terminal equipment side are transferred to the target MN.
  • scenario 3 may be a scenario in which the MN-triggered CPC before the handover and the MN-triggered CPC after the handover.
  • scenario 3 may be a scenario where the SN-triggered CPC before the handover and the SN-triggered CPC after the handover.
  • scenario 3 may be a scenario in which the MN-triggered CPC before the handover and the SN-triggered CPC after the handover.
  • scenario 3 may be a scenario in which the SN triggers the CPC before the handover, and the MN triggers the CPC after the handover.
  • Scenario 4 CPC before switching, and CPA after switching.
  • the source MN can send the information of the candidate SN's early data transfer to the target MN.
  • the source MN can transfer the data in the bearer to the target MN.
  • the downlink data packets that have not been correctly received by the terminal equipment are transferred to the target MN, and the uplink data packets received out of sequence from the terminal equipment side are transferred to the target MN.
  • scenario 4 the device that triggers the CPC is not limited.
  • scenario 4 may be a scenario in which the MN triggers the CPC before the handover and the CPA after the handover.
  • scenario 4 may be a scenario in which the SN triggers the CPC before the handover and the CPA after the handover.
  • Scenario 5 CPC before switching and DC after switching.
  • One possible solution can be the solution 1 of the above scenario 2; another possible solution can be the solution 2 of the previous scenario 2.
  • the early pair between the source SN and the candidate SN is between the bearer terminated by the SN in the source SN and the bearer terminated by the SN in the candidate SN in the CPC.
  • Early data transfer that is, before handover, the data packets on the bearer terminated by the SN in the source SN before the CPC are transferred to the data packets of the bearer terminated by the SN in the candidate SN in the CPC).
  • the source SN can continue to transfer data to the candidate SN.
  • the source MN does not need to send the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN to the target MN.
  • the source SN can send an indication message #4 to the candidate SN, indicating that all the corresponding bearer data packets have been transferred.
  • the indication information #4 may be a user plane indication, such as an end indication end marker.
  • the indication information #4 may also be a control plane indication, that is, the indication information #4 is sent to the candidate SN in the control plane.
  • the source SN may directly send the indication information #4 to the candidate SN, or may send the indication information #4 to the candidate SN through the target MN. After the candidate SN receives the indication information #4, the candidate SN can send the new data packet corresponding to the bearer received from the core network to the terminal device.
  • the source SN stops data transfer to the candidate SN.
  • the source MN can send the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN to the target MN.
  • the source SN can transfer the data packets corresponding to the bearer received from the core network to the target MN, and then the target MN transfers it to the SN.
  • scenario 5 the device that triggers the CPC is not limited.
  • scenario 5 may be a CPC triggered by the MN before the handover, and a DC scenario after the handover.
  • scenario 5 may be a CPC triggered by an SN before the handover and a DC scenario after the handover.
  • the target MN can learn the relevant information of the candidate SN configured on the network side before the handover (such as the identifier of the candidate SN configured on the network side before the handover and the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN).
  • the target MN may send the identity of the terminal device in the candidate SN to the candidate SN. Therefore, the early data transfer in the CPAC is performed before the handover, and after the handover, the network side can continue to utilize the data transferred in the previous early data transfer. If CPAC is also configured after the switch, no earlier data transfer is required for these data. If a DC is configured after handover, normal data transfer (ie traditional data transfer between MN-terminated bearers and SN-terminated bearers) may not be required for these data.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of a scenario in which a CPC is configured before handover and an SN handover occurs after the handover, which is applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 1300 is mainly illustrated by taking the interaction among the terminal device, the MN, the source SN, the candidate SN1, the candidate SN2, and the target SN as an example.
  • the source SN is used to represent the SN before handover
  • the target SN is used to represent the SN after the handover.
  • the method 1300 shown in FIG. 13 may include the following steps.
  • the network side configures the CPC for the terminal device.
  • Step 1310 may refer to the prior art or a manner that will appear later, and will not be described here.
  • the source SN or MN sends to the target SN the relevant information of the candidate SN configured on the network side before the handover.
  • the relevant information of the candidate SN may include, for example, one or more of the following: the identifier of the candidate SN configured on the network side before the handover, and the identifier of the terminal device on the candidate SN.
  • any manner that enables the target SN to know the relevant information of the candidate SN configured on the network side before the handover falls within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • it may be sent by the source SN as shown in FIG. 13 , or may be sent in other ways (eg, forwarded by the source MN), which is not limited.
  • the MN triggers CPC before the handover
  • the SN triggers the CPC after the handover.
  • the source SN When the source SN triggers the SN handover, for example, the source SN sends a SN change required message to the MN, and the SN change required message may carry the identifier of the target SN.
  • the MN After receiving the SN change required message sent by the source SN, the MN can send the relevant information of the candidate SN (such as the identifier of the candidate SN before handover and the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN) to the target SN. For example, after receiving the SN change required message sent by the source SN, the MN may send an SN addition request message to the target SN, and the SN addition request message may carry relevant information of the candidate SN.
  • the MN triggers the SN handover, for example, the MN sends a SN addition request message to the target SN, and the SN addition request message may carry relevant information of the candidate SN.
  • Scenario B the SN triggers CPC before the handover, and the SN triggers the CPC after the handover.
  • the source SN When the source SN triggers the SN handover, for example, the source SN sends a SN change request message to the MN, and the SN change request message may carry the information sent by the source SN to the target SN (eg, the relevant information of the candidate SN).
  • the MN After receiving the SN change required message sent by the source SN, the MN can send the relevant information of the candidate SN (such as the identifier of the candidate SN before handover and the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN) to the target SN.
  • the MN after receiving the SN change required message sent by the source SN, the MN may send an SN addition request message to the target SN, and the SN addition request message may carry relevant information of the candidate SN.
  • the source SN can first send the relevant information of the candidate SN to the MN (such as the identifier of the candidate SN before handover and the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN), and then the MN sends the candidate SN to the target SN.
  • related information for example, carried in the SN add request message.
  • the MN triggers the SN handover, for example, the MN sends a SN addition request message to the target SN, and the SN addition request message may carry relevant information of the candidate SN.
  • the MN triggers the CPC before the handover, and the DC scenario after the handover.
  • the source MN When the source MN triggers the SN handover, for example, the source MN sends the relevant information of the candidate SN to the target SN (such as the identifier of the candidate SN before the handover and the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN). For example, the MN sends an SN addition request message to the target SN, and the SN addition request message may carry relevant information of the candidate SN.
  • the CPC is triggered by the SN before the handover, and the DC is triggered after the handover.
  • the source SN When the source SN triggers SN handover, for example, the source SN sends a SN change request message to the MN, and the SN change request message can carry the identifier of the target SN and the related information of the candidate SN.
  • the MN may send an SN addition request message to the target SN, and the SN addition request message may carry relevant information of the candidate SN.
  • the target SN is introduced to obtain the relevant information of the candidate SN configured on the network side before handover. It should be understood that in different scenarios, it can be adaptively adjusted according to the situation of each scenario. As long as the target SN finally obtains the relevant information of the candidate SN configured on the network side before the handover, the solution is applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the target SN sends the identification information of the terminal device in the candidate SN to the candidate SN.
  • the target SN can send the identification information of the terminal device in the candidate SN to the candidate SN1 and the candidate SN2.
  • the MN triggers CPC before the handover
  • the SN triggers the CPC after the handover.
  • the target SN receives the relevant information of the candidate SN sent by the MN.
  • the target SN decides to trigger the CPC, and the candidate SN is the same as the candidate SN before the handover (for example, according to the relevant information of the candidate SN sent by the MN, it is determined that the candidate SN is the same as the candidate SN before the handover)
  • the target SN can send information to the candidate SN , the information can carry the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN.
  • the target SN can also send indication information #3 to the MN, where the indication information #3 is used to instruct to use or maintain the information related to the terminal device in the candidate SN (for example, it may include one or more of the following: candidate SN) The context of the terminal device in the SN, the early data transfer performed before the candidate SN).
  • the indication information #3 may be carried in the same message as the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN, or may be sent separately, which is not limited.
  • the MN may send the indication information #3 to the candidate SN, for example, the MN sends an SN release request message to the candidate SN, and the SN release request message carries the indication information #3.
  • Scenario B the SN triggers CPC before the handover, and the SN triggers the CPC after the handover.
  • the target SN receives the relevant information of the candidate SN sent by the source SN.
  • the target SN decides to trigger the CPC, and the candidate SN is the same as the candidate SN before the handover (for example, according to the relevant information of the candidate SN sent by the MN, it is determined that the candidate SN is the same as the candidate SN before the handover)
  • the target SN can send information to the candidate SN , the information can carry the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN.
  • the target SN can also send indication information #3 to the MN, where the indication information #3 is used to instruct to use or maintain the information related to the terminal device in the candidate SN (for example, it may include one or more of the following: candidate SN) The context of the terminal device in the SN, the early data transfer performed before the candidate SN).
  • the indication information #3 may be carried in the same message as the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN, or may be sent separately, which is not limited.
  • the MN may send the indication information #3 to the candidate SN, for example, the MN sends an SN release request message to the candidate SN, and the SN release request message carries the indication information #3.
  • the MN may send configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information may be the configuration information of the DC or the configuration information of the CPC.
  • the target SN receives the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN.
  • the MN or the source SN may send the information of the candidate SN's early data transfer to the target SN.
  • the MN can directly send the information of the candidate SN's early data transfer to the target SN.
  • the MN may first send the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN to the source SN, and then the source SN sends the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN to the target SN.
  • FIG. 13 only shows the case where the source SN sends the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN to the target SN. It should be understood that FIG. 13 is only an exemplary illustration, which does not limit the scope of the present application.
  • the information on the early data transfer of the candidate SN may include, for example, one or more of the following: which data packets have been transferred early by the source MN to the candidate SN (for example, indicated by the PDCP SN or NR-U sequence number), the candidate SN Which early data transfer packets can be dropped.
  • the MN triggers CPC before the handover
  • the SN triggers the CPC after the handover.
  • the MN can send the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN to the target SN.
  • the target SN After receiving the early data transfer information of the candidate SN, the target SN can notify the candidate SN which data packets of early data transfer can be discarded, that is, the target SN can send indication information #1 to the candidate SN.
  • the target SN can decide which data packets need to perform early data transfer to the candidate SN according to which data packets the MN has performed early data transfer to the candidate SN.
  • the target SN can also send a plurality of indication information #1 to the candidate SN according to the situation of the downlink data packets sent by the target SN to the terminal device, so as to indicate which data packets of early data transfer the candidate SN can discard.
  • Scenario B the SN triggers CPC before the handover, and the SN triggers the CPC after the handover.
  • the MN or the source SN can send the target SN the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN.
  • the target SN can notify the candidate SN which data packets of early data transfer can be discarded, that is, the target SN can send indication information #1 to the candidate SN.
  • the target SN can decide which early data packets need to be transferred to the candidate SN according to which data packets the MN has performed early data transfer to the candidate SN, and which data packets the source SN has performed early data transfer to the candidate SN. data transfer. Therefore, the transfer of duplicate packets can be avoided as much as possible.
  • the target SN can also send a plurality of indication information #1 to the candidate SN according to the situation of the downlink data packets sent by the target SN to the terminal device, so as to indicate which data packets of early data transfer the candidate SN can discard.
  • the MN triggers the CPC before the handover, and the DC scenario after the handover.
  • the MN can send the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN to the target SN.
  • the MN or the source SN can send the target SN the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN.
  • the target SN receives the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN. It should be understood that in different scenarios, it can be adaptively adjusted according to the situation of each scenario. As long as the target SN is made aware of the information about the early data transfer of the candidate SN, the solution is applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the target SN sends downlink data to the terminal device.
  • the MN triggers CPC before the handover
  • the SN triggers the CPC after the handover.
  • the candidate SN can send downlink data to the terminal device according to the latest early data transfer information and the early transferred data. For example, the candidate SN can send downlink data to the terminal device according to the latest indication information #1 and the data transferred earlier, such as discarding the discarded data packets indicated in the indication information #1, and send the rest of the early transferred data packets to the terminal device data pack.
  • Scenario B the SN triggers CPC before the handover, and the SN triggers the CPC after the handover.
  • the MN triggers the CPC before the handover, and the DC scenario after the handover.
  • the SN After the terminal device determines that the trigger condition of the candidate PSCell is satisfied and accesses the candidate PSCell, the SN can send the data in the previous early data transfer to the terminal device according to the data.
  • Scenario D the SN triggers CPC before the handover, and the MR-DC scenario after the handover.
  • the target SN learns the relevant information of the candidate SN configured on the network side before the handover (such as the identifier of the candidate SN configured on the network side before the handover and the identifier of the terminal device in the candidate SN), and the target SN can send the terminal device before the handover to the candidate SN.
  • the identifier of the device in the candidate SN can receive the information of the early data transfer of the candidate SN before the handover, so that after the handover, the network side can continue to use the data transferred in the previous early data transfer.
  • CPC is also configured after the switch, no earlier data transfer is required for this data. If a DC is configured after handover, normal data transfer (ie data transfer between legacy MN-terminated bearers and SN-terminated bearers) may not be required for these data.
  • steps 1310-1350 shown in FIG. 13 exemplarily introduces the scenario in which CPC is configured before handover, and then SN handover occurs. It should be understood that the above steps are only exemplary descriptions and are not strictly limited. In addition, the size of the sequence numbers of the above processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of a scenario in which a CPAC is not configured before handover and an MN handover occurs after the handover according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 1400 is mainly illustrated by taking the interaction among the terminal device, the source MN, the source SN, the candidate SN1 , the target SN, and the target MN as an example.
  • the source SN is used to represent the SN before handover
  • the target SN is used to represent the SN after the handover
  • the source MN is used to represent the MN before the handover
  • the target MN is used to represent the MN after the handover.
  • the method 1400 shown in FIG. 14 may include the following steps.
  • the network side configures a DC for the terminal device.
  • the MN sends an SN addition request message to the SN, and the SN feeds back a SN addition request response to the MN.
  • the MN may notify the terminal device to configure the DC, for example, the MN sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device, and the RRC reconfiguration message notifies the terminal device to configure the DC.
  • step 1410 is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • step 1410 may refer to the prior art or to a later-appearing manner.
  • the source MN sends a handover request message to the target MN.
  • the source MN may also send the identifier of the SN before the handover and the identifier of the terminal device at the SN to the target MN.
  • the handover request message carries the identity of the SN before the handover and the identity of the terminal device at the SN.
  • the target MN sends a SN addition request message to the target SN or the candidate SN.
  • the target MN may also send the identity of the terminal device at the SN before the handover to the target SN or the candidate SN.
  • the SN addition request message carries the identifier of the terminal device at the SN before the handover.
  • the target SN may be the SN before the handover, or may not be the SN before the handover, which is not limited.
  • step 1430 the target MN sends a SN addition request message to the candidate SN.
  • the source SN can perform data transfer to the target MN.
  • the source SN directly transfers data to the target MN; for another example, the source SN may transfer data packets to the source MN first, and then the source MN sends the transferred data packets to the target MN.
  • the target MN can know which data packets the candidate SN has received before based on the data packets transferred by the source SN, so that the early data transfer between the target MN and the candidate SN does not need to perform data transfer on these data packets. In a possible way, the target MN knows that the candidate SN has already been assigned by the target MN according to the downlink sequence number that the target MN needs to allocate carried in the SN status transfer sent by the source MN and the data packets received from the source MN. which packets were received.
  • step 1430 the target MN sends a SN addition request message to the candidate SN.
  • the source SN can perform data transfer to the target SN.
  • the source SN transfers data directly to the target SN; for another example, the source SN can transfer data packets to the source MN first, and then transfer the data packets from the source MN to the target MN, and then the target MN sends the transferred data packets to the target SN.
  • the target SN can learn which data packets have been received by the candidate SN before according to the data packets transferred by the source SN. For a specific manner, reference may be made to the manner in the first case above.
  • step 1430 the target MN sends a SN addition request message to the target SN. Then the target S can send the identification of the terminal device at the SN before the handover to the candidate SN.
  • the source SN can perform data transfer to the target SN.
  • the target SN can learn which data packets the candidate SN has received before according to the data packets transferred by the source SN. Specifically, refer to the above-mentioned second situation, which is not repeated here.
  • the target MN may also send configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information includes the configuration information of the CPAC.
  • the candidate SN receives indication information #3, indicating to use or maintain the information related to the terminal device in the candidate SN.
  • the information related to the terminal device in the candidate SN may include, for example, one or more of the following: the context of the terminal device in the candidate SN, and the early data transfer performed before the candidate SN.
  • the candidate SN1 receives the indication information #3, indicating that the data packet received before the handover is continued to be used as the data packet of the early data transfer.
  • the target MN sends the indication information #3 to the candidate SN.
  • the target SN sends the indication information #3 to the candidate SN; or the target SN first sends it to the MN, and then the MN sends it to the candidate SN.
  • the candidate SN sends downlink data to the terminal device.
  • the candidate SN may receive indication information #1, where the indication information #1 is used to inform the candidate SN which data packets of early data transfer may be discarded.
  • the candidate SN may receive the indication #1 from the MN, or may receive the indication #1 from the target SN.
  • the terminal device accesses the candidate PSCell. For example, the terminal device performs a random access process with the candidate PSCell.
  • the terminal device accesses the candidate SN, and the candidate SN can send the data packets in the early data transfer (including the data packets received before the handover) to the terminal device according to the indication information #1 and the information of the early data transfer.
  • the candidate SN knows that the SN before the handover and the candidate after the handover are the same SN, and the candidate SN can transfer the data packets in the early data transfer (including the data packets received before the handover according to the most recent indication information #1 received). ) to the terminal device.
  • the target MN configures the early data transfer of the CPAC for the terminal device.
  • the data packets received by the candidate SN before the handover can be used as the data packets of the early data transfer, so as to avoid transferring these data packets again in the early data transfer. The transmission delay of these packets can be reduced.
  • a base station eg, MN, SN
  • MN mobile node
  • SN network node
  • the SN addition request message is mentioned many times, which may also be recorded as an SN addition request message, and its name does not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • an SN addition request message is sent, and the SN addition request message is for the condition of SN addition; in the case of changing the PSCell, an SN addition request message is sent, the SN addition The request message is added for conditional SN changes.
  • the above is only an exemplary description, and the content specifically indicated by the SN addition request message is not strictly limited.
  • a SN addition request message is sent, and the SN addition request message is for the conditional SN addition. That is to say, it can be defined that the SN increase request message is for conditional SN increase, specifically regardless of whether the SN is changed or the SN is increased.
  • the transfer of data packets is mentioned many times, which is mainly used to indicate that the data packets that have not been transmitted and/or the data packets that have failed to be transmitted are transferred.
  • the data packet may be an uplink data packet or a downlink data packet, which is not limited.
  • the source network device may transfer the downlink data packets to be sent to the terminal device to the target network device.
  • the source network device may transfer uplink data packets received out of sequence from the terminal device side to the target network device.
  • the early data transfer between the MN and the SN in Figures 12 to 14 includes the early data transfer of the SCG/MCG/split bearer terminated by the SN in the candidate SN in the CPAC, and may also include the transfer between the MN and the SN.
  • Early data transfer for MN terminated SCG/Split bearer in MN Unless otherwise specified, this application does not limit the form of data packets for early data transfer.
  • the methods and operations implemented by the terminal device may also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in the terminal device, and the methods implemented by network devices (such as MN, SN) and operations, may also be implemented by components (eg, chips or circuits) that may be used in a network device.
  • components such as chips or circuits
  • network devices such as MN, SN
  • components eg, chips or circuits
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic block diagram of an apparatus for data transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 1500 includes a transceiver unit 1510 and a processing unit 1520 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can implement corresponding communication functions, and the processing unit 1520 is used for data processing.
  • Transceiver unit 1510 may also be referred to as a communication interface or a communication unit.
  • the apparatus 1500 may further include a storage unit, which may be used to store instructions and/or data, and the processing unit 1520 may read the instructions and/or data in the storage unit, so that the apparatus implements the foregoing method embodiments .
  • a storage unit which may be used to store instructions and/or data
  • the processing unit 1520 may read the instructions and/or data in the storage unit, so that the apparatus implements the foregoing method embodiments .
  • the apparatus 1500 may be configured to perform the actions performed by the network device in the above method embodiments.
  • the apparatus 1500 may be a network device or a component configurable in the network device, and the transceiver unit 1510 is configured to perform the above method embodiments.
  • the processing unit 1520 is configured to perform the operations related to the processing on the network device side in the above method embodiments.
  • the apparatus 1500 is configured to perform the actions performed by the primary network device (eg, MN) in the above method embodiments.
  • the primary network device eg, MN
  • the processing unit 1520 is used to configure the condition-based candidate PSCell addition or change for the terminal device; the transceiver unit 1510 is used to perform early data transmission to the network equipment to which the candidate PSCell belongs.
  • the terminal device accesses the candidate PSCell, it sends one or more data packets to the network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs.
  • the data packet is in the form of a protocol data unit of the packet data convergence layer protocol; the one or more data packets include: configured for the terminal device data packets on the MN-terminated secondary cell group bearer, and/or data packets on the MN-terminated split bearer configured for the terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is further configured to send first indication information to the network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs, where the first indication information is used to indicate early data transmission of the MN-terminated secondary cell group bearer and/or the MN-terminated split bearer .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is further configured to send second indication information to the network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs, where the second indication information is used to instruct to discard or ignore some or all of the one or more data packets.
  • the second indication information includes information of one or more sequence numbers, and the information of one or more sequence numbers is used to indicate that part or all of the one or more data packets are discarded or ignored.
  • the sequence number is a packet data convergence protocol sequence number or a new air interface user plane sequence number.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is specifically configured to send the second indication information to the network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs when the preset condition is satisfied.
  • the apparatus 1500 may implement steps or processes corresponding to those performed by the master network device (eg, MN) in the method embodiments according to the embodiments of the present application.
  • a unit of a method performed by a network device eg, a MN.
  • each unit in the apparatus 1500 and the other operations and/or functions mentioned above are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes of the method embodiments in the main network device (eg, MN) in FIG. 7 , FIG. 9 to FIG. 11 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to execute the step 720 of the method 700 ; the processing unit 1520 can be used to execute the processing steps of the method 700 , such as the step 710 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to execute steps 920 and 940 in the method 900 ; the processing unit 1520 can be used to execute the processing steps in the method 900 , such as step 910 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to execute steps 1020 and 1040 in the method 1000 ; the processing unit 1520 can be used to execute the processing steps in the method 1000 , such as step 1010 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to execute steps 1120 and 1140 in the method 1100 ; the processing unit 1520 can be used to execute the processing steps in the method 1100 , such as step 1110 .
  • the apparatus 1500 is configured to perform the actions performed by the candidate network device (eg, the candidate SN) in the above method embodiments.
  • the candidate network device eg, the candidate SN
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is used to receive one or more data packets from the MN, the data packets are in the form of protocol data units of the packet data convergence layer protocol, and the one or more data packets include: MN-terminated secondary cell group bearer, and/or data packet on the MN-terminated split bearer configured for the terminal device; the processing unit 1520 is used to access the terminal device; the transceiver unit 1510 is also used to Send some or all of the one or more data packets to the terminal device; wherein, the terminal device is configured with a condition-based candidate primary and secondary cell PSCell addition or change.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is further configured to receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to instruct to discard or ignore some or all of the one or more data packets; A plurality of data packets and the second indication information are used to send data to the terminal device.
  • the second indication information includes information of one or more sequence numbers, and the information of one or more sequence numbers is used to indicate that part or all of the one or more data packets are discarded or ignored.
  • the sequence number is a packet data convergence protocol sequence number or a new air interface user plane sequence number.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is specifically configured to periodically receive the second indication information.
  • the apparatus 1500 may implement steps or processes corresponding to the candidate network devices (eg, candidate SNs) in the method embodiments according to the embodiments of the present application. Element of a method performed by a candidate network device (eg, a candidate SN). Moreover, the units in the apparatus 1500 and the other operations and/or functions mentioned above are respectively to implement the corresponding processes of the method embodiments in the candidate network devices (eg, candidate SNs) in the SNs in FIG. 7 , FIG. 9 to FIG. 11 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to execute steps 720 and 730 in the method 700 ;
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to execute steps 940 , 950 and 960 in the method 900 ; the processing unit 1520 can be used to execute the processing steps of the method 900 , such as step 910 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to perform steps 1040 , 1050 and 1060 in the method 1000 ; the processing unit 1520 can be used to perform the processing steps in the method 1000 , such as step 1010 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to perform steps 1140 , 1150 and 1160 in the method 1100 ; the processing unit 1520 can be used to perform the processing steps in the method 1100 , such as step 1110 .
  • the apparatus 1500 is configured to perform the actions performed by the source network device (eg, the source MN or the source SN) in the above method embodiments.
  • the source network device eg, the source MN or the source SN
  • the processing unit 1520 is configured to determine that the network device configured for the terminal device after the handover includes the second network device, wherein, before the terminal device is switched from the apparatus 1500 to the target network device, the second network device belongs to the target network device.
  • the second network device belongs to the condition-based network device configured for the terminal device.
  • Condition-based candidate primary and secondary cells configured for the device In the case of adding or changing candidate network devices in the scenario, the second network device belongs to the condition-based candidate configured for the terminal device before handover from the terminal device 1500 to the target network device
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is configured to send third indication information to the second network device, and the third indication information is used for Instruct to use the information related to the terminal device in the second network device.
  • the information related to the terminal device includes one or more of the following: context information of the terminal device, data packets of the terminal device that have been transmitted to the second network device, and data packets of the terminal device that can be discarded by the second network device Information.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is further configured to receive the identification information of the second network device sent from the target network device; the processing unit 1520 is specifically configured to determine, according to the identification information of the second network device, the device configured for the terminal device after switching.
  • the network device includes a second network device.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is further configured to send the early data transmission information of the second network device to the target network device.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is further configured to send the information of one or more network devices to the target network device, wherein the one or more network devices include a second network device, and the one or more network devices are: a terminal device from Before the source network device switches to the target network device, the condition-based candidate PSCell configured for the terminal device adds or changes the candidate network device in the scenario, or, the network device that provides services for the terminal device, the information of one or more network devices includes One or more of the following: identification information of one or more network devices, identification information of a terminal device on one or more network devices.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is specifically configured to send a handover request message to the target network device, where the handover request message includes information of one or more network devices.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is further configured to send the data packet to be sent to the terminal device to the target network device or the second network device.
  • the target network device is a network device in a condition-based candidate PSCell addition or change scenario
  • the apparatus 1500 is a network device in a condition-based candidate PSCell addition or change scenario
  • the target network device is a condition-based candidate PSCell Adding or changing the network equipment in the scenario
  • the apparatus 1500 is the network equipment in the carrier aggregation scenario
  • the target network equipment is the network equipment in the carrier aggregation scenario
  • the apparatus 1500 is the condition-based candidate PSCell adding or changing the network equipment in the scenario .
  • the apparatus 1500 may implement steps or processes corresponding to those performed by the source network device (such as the source MN or the source SN) in the method embodiments according to the embodiments of the present application, and the apparatus 1500 may include steps or processes for executing FIGS. Elements of a method performed by a source network device (eg, source MN or source SN) in 14.
  • each unit in the apparatus 1500 and the above-mentioned other operations and/or functions are respectively to implement the corresponding processes of the method embodiments in FIG. 8 and FIG. 12 to FIG. 14 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to execute steps 8202 and 840 in the method 800;
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to execute steps 1220 , 1240 , 1250 and 1260 in the method 1200 ; the processing unit 1520 can be used to execute the processing steps in the method 1200 , such as step 1210 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to execute steps 1320 and 1340 in the method 1300 ; the processing unit 1520 can be used to execute the processing steps in the method 1300 , such as step 1310 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to execute step 1420 in the method 1400 ; the processing unit 1520 can be used to execute the processing steps in the method 1400 , such as step 1410 .
  • the apparatus 1500 is configured to perform the actions performed by the target network device (eg, the target MN or the target SN) in the above method embodiments.
  • the target network device eg, the target MN or the target SN
  • the processing unit 1520 is configured to determine to configure N first network devices for the terminal device, where the N first network devices include second network devices, and N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1, where in Before the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the apparatus 1500, when the second network device belongs to the candidate network device in the scenario where the condition-based candidate primary and secondary cells configured for the terminal device is added or changed, the terminal device is switched from the source network device.
  • the second network device belongs to the candidate network device in the scenario of adding or changing the condition-based candidate PSCell configured for the terminal device, or the second network device belongs to the network device that provides services for the terminal device;
  • the device is switched from the source network device to the apparatus 1500, if the second network device belongs to the condition-based candidate primary and secondary cell PSCells configured for the terminal device, the terminal device is switched from the source network device to the candidate network device in the scenario where the PSCell is added or changed.
  • the second network device belongs to the candidate network device in the scenario of adding or changing the condition-based candidate PSCell configured for the terminal device, or the second network device belongs to the network device that provides services for the terminal device; the transceiver unit 1510, using for sending the third indication information, where the third indication information is used for instructing to use the information related to the terminal device in the second network device.
  • the information related to the terminal device includes one or more of the following: context information of the terminal device, data packets of the terminal device that have been transmitted to the second network device, and data packets of the terminal device that can be discarded by the second network device Information.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is specifically configured to send the third indication information to the second network device; or, send the third indication information to the source network device.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is further configured to receive early data transmission information of the second network device sent by the source network device.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is further configured to perform early data transmission with the second network device according to the early data transmission information of the second network device.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is further configured to send the identification information of the second network device to the source network device.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is further configured to receive information from one or more network devices of the source network device, wherein the one or more network devices include a second network device, and the one or more network devices are: a terminal device Before switching from the source network device to the target network device, the condition-based candidate PSCell configured for the terminal device is added or the candidate network device in the scenario is changed, or the network device that provides services for the terminal device, information of one or more network devices It includes one or more of the following: identification information of one or more network devices, and identification information of a terminal device on one or more network devices.
  • the information of one or more network devices includes identification information of one or more network devices
  • the processing unit 1520 is further configured to determine, according to the identification information of one or more network devices, that the N first network devices include the first network device. 2. Network equipment.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 is specifically configured to receive a handover request message, where the handover request message includes information of one or more network devices.
  • the apparatus 1500 is a network device in a condition-based candidate PSCell addition or change scenario, and the source network device is a network device in a condition-based candidate PSCell addition or change scenario; or, the apparatus 1500 is a condition-based candidate PSCell addition Or the network device in the change scenario, the source network device is the network device in the carrier aggregation scenario; or, the apparatus 1500 is the network device in the carrier aggregation scenario, and the source network device is the condition-based candidate PSCell addition or change The network device in the scenario .
  • the apparatus 1500 may implement steps or processes corresponding to the target network device (eg, the target MN or the target SN) in the method embodiments according to the embodiments of the present application. Elements of a method performed by a target network device (eg, a target MN or a target SN) in 14.
  • a target network device eg, a target MN or a target SN
  • each unit in the apparatus 1500 and the above-mentioned other operations and/or functions are respectively to implement the corresponding processes of the method embodiments in FIG. 8 and FIG. 12 to FIG. 14 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to execute steps 8201 , 8201 and 840 of the method 800 ; the processing unit 1520 can be used to execute the processing steps of the method 800 , such as step 810 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to perform steps 1220 , 1230 , 1240 and 1260 in the method 1200 ; the processing unit 1520 can be used to perform the processing steps in the method 1200 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to execute steps 1320 , 1330 and 1340 in the method 1300 ; the processing unit 1520 can be used to execute the processing steps of the method 1300 .
  • the transceiver unit 1510 can be used to perform steps 1420 , 1430 and 1440 in the method 1400 ; the processing unit 1520 can be used to perform the processing steps in the method 1400 .
  • the processing unit 1520 in the above embodiments may be implemented by at least one processor or processor-related circuits.
  • the transceiver unit 1510 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit.
  • the storage unit may be implemented by at least one memory.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides an apparatus 1600 for data transmission.
  • the apparatus 1600 includes a processor 1610 coupled to a memory 1620 for storing computer programs or instructions and/or data, and the processor 1610 for executing the computer programs or instructions and/or data stored in the memory 1620 such that The methods in the above method embodiments are performed.
  • the apparatus 1600 includes one or more processors 1610 .
  • the apparatus 1600 may further include a memory 1620 .
  • the device 1600 may include one or more memories 1620 .
  • the memory 1620 may be integrated with the processor 1610, or provided separately.
  • the apparatus 1600 may further include a transceiver 1630, and the transceiver 1630 is used for signal reception and/or transmission.
  • the processor 1610 is used to control the transceiver 1630 to receive and/or transmit signals.
  • the apparatus 1600 is configured to implement the operations performed by the network device in the above method embodiments.
  • the processor 1610 is configured to implement the processing-related operations performed by the master network device (such as the MN) in the above method embodiments
  • the transceiver 1630 is configured to implement the transceiving-related operations performed by the master network device in the above method embodiments. operate.
  • the processor 1610 is configured to implement the processing-related operations performed by the candidate network device (eg, candidate SN) in the above method embodiments
  • the transceiver 1630 is configured to implement the transceiving performed by the candidate network device in the above method embodiments related operations.
  • the processor 1610 is configured to implement the processing-related operations performed by the source network device (eg, source MN or source SN) in the above method embodiments
  • the transceiver 1630 is configured to implement the above method embodiments by the source network device. Transceiver-related operations performed.
  • the processor 1610 is configured to implement the processing-related operations performed by the target network device (eg, the target MN or the target SN) in the above method embodiments
  • the transceiver 1630 is configured to implement the above method embodiments by the target network device Transceiver-related operations performed.
  • This embodiment of the present application further provides a communication apparatus 1700, where the communication apparatus 1700 may be a network device or a chip.
  • the communication apparatus 1700 may be configured to perform the operations performed by the network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • Fig. 17 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of a base station.
  • the base station includes part 1710 and part 1720.
  • the 1710 part is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals; the 1720 part is mainly used for baseband processing and controlling the base station.
  • the 1710 part may generally be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver.
  • the 1720 part is usually the control center of the base station, which can usually be called a processing unit, and is used to control the base station to perform the processing operations on the receiving end device side in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the transceiver unit of part 1710 which may also be called a transceiver or a transceiver, etc., includes an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, where the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for radio frequency processing.
  • the device used for implementing the receiving function in part 1710 may be regarded as a receiving unit
  • the device used for implementing the sending function may be regarded as a sending unit, that is, part 1710 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit may also be referred to as a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit, and the like
  • the transmitting unit may be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, and the like.
  • the 1720 portion may include one or more single boards, each of which may include one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the processor is used to read and execute the program in the memory to realize the baseband processing function and control the base station. If there are multiple boards, each board can be interconnected to enhance the processing capability.
  • one or more processors may be shared by multiple boards, or one or more memories may be shared by multiple boards, or one or more processors may be shared by multiple boards at the same time. device.
  • FIG. 17 is only an example and not a limitation, and the above-mentioned network device including a transceiver unit and a processing unit may not depend on the structure shown in FIG. 17 .
  • the chip When the device 1700 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit may be a processor, a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
  • the apparatus 1700 may also be a chip system or a processing system, so that a device on which the apparatus 1700 is installed can implement the methods and functions of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, on which computer instructions for implementing the method executed by the network device in the foregoing method embodiments are stored.
  • the computer program when executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method executed by the network device in the above method embodiments.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product including instructions, which, when executed by a computer, enable the computer to implement the method executed by the network device in the above method embodiments.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, where the communication system includes the network devices in the above embodiments, such as a primary network device and a candidate network device, or a source network device and a target network device, or a source network device, a target network device Network devices and candidate network devices.
  • the communication system includes the network devices in the above embodiments, such as a primary network device and a candidate network device, or a source network device and a target network device, or a source network device, a target network device Network devices and candidate network devices.
  • processors mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), application-specific integrated circuits ( application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory and/or a non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM).
  • RAM can be used as an external cache.
  • RAM may include the following forms: static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM) , double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and Direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM).
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
  • Direct memory bus random access memory direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • the processor is a general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, or discrete hardware components
  • the memory storage module
  • memory described herein is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
  • the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to implement the solution provided in this application.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the computer may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device or the like.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center is by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that includes an integration of one or more available media.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disks (SSDs), etc.
  • the aforementioned usable media may include But not limited to: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Data Exchanges In Wide-Area Networks (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种数据传输的方法和装置。该方法可包括：为终端设备配置基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变；主网络设备向候选PSCell所属的网络设备进行早期数据传输，如，在终端设备接入候选PSCell前，向候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送数据包，该数据包的形式为分组数据汇聚层协议的协议数据单元；该数据包包括：MN终止的辅小区组承载和/或MN终止的分裂承载的数据包。这样，终端设备接入候选网络设备后，候选网络设备可向终端设备发送已转移的数据，可减少数据传输的时延。此外，本申请可支持MN终止的辅小区组承载和/或MN终止的分裂承载的数据包的早期数据转移，可减少这些承载中数据的传输时延。

Description

数据传输的方法和装置 技术领域
本申请涉及通信技术领域，并且更具体地，涉及一种数据传输的方法和装置。
背景技术
在基于条件的主辅小区(primary secondary cell group cell，PSCell)增加或改变(conditional PSCell addition/change，CPAC)中，终端设备可以在一个或多个候选PSCell中的一个满足其对应的条件时，直接接入到该满足条件的候选PSCell，从而能够缩短增加或改变PSCell所需的时延。
但是终端设备接入到候选PSCell之后，需要等切换前的设备把数据的包发送给候选PSCell之后才能给终端设备发送数据，这增加了这些数据包的传输时延。
发明内容
本申请提供一种数据传输的方法和装置，以期可以减少数据传输的时延。
第一方面，提供了一种数据传输的方法，该方法可以由网络设备执行，或者，也可以由用于网络设备的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定，为了便于描述，下面以由网络设备执行为例进行说明。
该方法可以包括：为终端设备配置基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变；向候选PSCell所属的网络设备进行早期数据传输，早期数据传输是指在终端设备接入候选PSCell之前，向候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送一个或多个数据包，数据包的形式为分组数据汇聚层协议的协议数据单元；一个或多个数据包包括：为终端设备配置的主基站MN终止的辅小区组承载上的数据包，和/或，为终端设备配置的MN终止的分裂承载上的数据包。
上述方法可以由主网络设备(如主节点(master node，MN)(或者说主基站))执行，或者，也可以由用于主网络设备的芯片或电路执行。
关于MN终止的辅小区组承载(secondary cell group bearer，SCG bearer)或MN终止的分裂承载(split bearer)，早期数据传输也可以称为早期数据转移，或者也可以为其他名称，其命名不对本申请实施例保护范围造成限定。
基于上述技术方案，主网络设备与候选网络设备(如候选辅节点(secondary node，SN))之间可以进行早期数据转移，这样终端设备接入到候选网络设备之后，候选网络设备可以向终端设备发送已经转移过来的数据，从而可以减少数据传输的时延。
此外，对于MN终止的辅小区组承载和/或MN终止的分裂承载，MN也可以向候选网络设备进行早期数据传输，如通过分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)的协议数据单元(protocol data unit，PDU)(PDCP PDU)的形式进行早期数据转移。因此，本申请实施例可以支持MN终止的辅小区组承载和/或MN终止的 分裂承载的数据包的早期数据转移，可以减少这些承载中数据的传输时延。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：向候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示进行MN终止的辅小区组承载和/或MN终止的分裂承载的早期数据传输。
一可能的方式，该第一指示信息可以通过主网络设备与候选网络设备(如MN与候选SN)的控制面接口发送，也可以通过主网络设备与候选网络设备之间的用户面接口发送。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：向候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示丢弃或忽略一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包。
基于上述技术方案，主网络设备可以向候选网络设备发送第二指示信息，指示丢弃或忽略早期数据传输的部分或全部数据包。通过该方式，可以避免候选网络设备中保留或者候选网络设备向终端设备重复发送一些终端设备已成功接收的数据包，可以减少资源浪费。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第二指示信息包括一个或多个序列号的信息，一个或多个序列号的信息用于指示丢弃或忽略一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包。
一可能的方式，该第二指示信息可以为一个序列号。假设记为序列号#A。例如，通过该序列号#A，可以指示候选网络设备需要丢弃或忽略那些之前转移的数据包(如PDCP PDU)中对应的序列号比序列号#A更低的那些数据包。也就是说，如果主网络设备要指示丢弃或忽略比序列号#A更低的序列号对应的数据包，那么，主网络设备可以向候选网络设备指示序列号#A。
又一可能的方式，该第二指示信息可以为多个序列号，如序列号列表的形式。例如，通过该序列号列表，可以指示候选网络设备需要丢弃或忽略那些之前转移的数据包(如PDCP PDU)中序列号列表中序列号所对应的那些数据包。也就是说，主网络设备可以指示丢弃或忽略的数据包所对应的序列号。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，序列号为分组数据汇聚协议序列号或新空口用户面序列号。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，向候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送第二指示信息，包括：满足预设条件的情况下，向候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送第二指示信息。
预设条件，可以是关于时间上的限定(如周期性发送)，或者也可以是关于数据量的限定(如数据量与门限值或门限范围的比较)，或者也可以是其他方面的限定。
第二方面，提供了一种数据传输的方法，该方法可以由网络设备执行，或者，也可以由用于网络设备的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定，为了便于描述，下面以由网络设备执行为例进行说明。
该方法可以包括：在终端设备接入之前，从主基站MN接收一个或多个数据包，数据包的形式为分组数据汇聚层协议的协议数据单元，一个或多个数据包包括：为终端设备配置的MN终止的辅小区组承载上的数据包，和/或，为终端设备配置的MN终止的分裂承载上的数据包；在终端设备接入之后，向终端设备发送一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部 数据包；其中，终端设备配置了基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变。
上述方法可以由候选网络设备(如候选SN)执行，或者，也可以由用于候选网络设备的芯片或电路执行。
基于上述技术方案，主网络设备与候选网络设备之间可以进行早期数据转移，这样终端设备接入到候选网络设备之后，候选网络设备可以向终端设备发送已经转移过来的数据，从而可以减少数据传输的时延。
此外，对于MN终止的辅小区组承载和/或MN终止的分裂承载，MN也可以向候选网络设备进行早期数据传输，如通过PDCP PDU的形式进行早期数据转移。因此，本申请实施例可以支持MN终止的辅小区组承载和/或MN终止的分裂承载的数据包的早期数据转移，可以减少这些承载中数据的传输时延。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，接收第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示丢弃或忽略一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包；向终端设备发送一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包，包括：根据一个或多个数据包以及第二指示信息，向终端设备发送数据。
基于上述技术方案，可以避免候选网络设备向终端设备重复发送一些终端设备已成功接收的数据包，可以减少资源浪费。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第二指示信息包括一个或多个序列号的信息，一个或多个序列号的信息用于指示丢弃或忽略一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，序列号为分组数据汇聚协议序列号或新空口用户面序列号。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，接收第二指示信息，包括：周期性地接收第二指示信息。
示例地，候选网络设备可以根据早期数据转移的数据以及最近一次收到的第二指示信息，向终端设备发送数据。
第三方面，提供了一种数据传输的方法，该方法可以由网络设备执行，或者，也可以由用于网络设备的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定，为了便于描述，下面以由网络设备执行为例进行说明。
该方法可以包括：目标网络设备确定为终端设备配置N个第一网络设备，N个第一网络设备包括第二网络设备，N为大于1或等于1的整数，其中，在终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备的情况下，终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，第二网络设备属于为终端设备提供服务的网络设备；或者，在终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备的情况下，终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，第二网络设备属于为终端设备提供服务的网络设备；目标网络设备发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示使用第二网 络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。
上述方法可以由目标网络设备(如目标MN或者目标SN)执行，或者，也可以由用于目标网络设备(如目标MN或者目标SN)的芯片或电路执行。
示例地，终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前，可以理解为，为终端设备提供服务的网络设备从源网络设备变为目标网络设备之前，或者为终端设备配置的候选网络设备从源网络设备变为目标网络设备之前，或者为终端设备提供服务的网络设备或者为终端设备配置的候选网络设备改变之前。
示例地，终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后，可以理解为，为终端设备提供服务的网络设备从源网络设备变为目标网络设备之后，或者为终端设备配置的候选网络设备从源网络设备变为目标网络设备之后，或者为终端设备提供服务的网络设备或者为终端设备配置的候选网络设备改变之后。
基于上述技术方案，针对切换前配置了基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变，和/或，切换后配置了基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变的场景，切换后确定为终端设备配置的网络设备包括切换之前为终端设备配置的网络设备的情况下，可以利用之前已转移的数据，从而避免对这些数据包再进行一次转移，可以减少这些数据包的传输时延。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，目标网络设备发送第三指示信息，包括：目标网络设备向第二网络设备发送第三指示信息；或者，目标网络设备向源网络设备发送第三指示信息。
一示例，目标网络设备可以向第二网络设备发送第三指示信息，指示使用或保持该第二网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息，例如可以包括但不限于：第二网络设备中终端设备的上下文、第二网络设备之前进行的早期数据转移。
又一示例，目标网络设备可以向源网络设备发送第三指示信息。该第三指示信息如可以携带于切换请求响应消息中。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：目标网络设备接收来自源网络设备的第二网络设备的早期数据传输信息。
因此，目标网络设备通过获知第二网络设备早期数据传输的情况，进而可以进行合理的处理，如对于之前已转移的数据包不需要再进行转移。
示例地，第二网络设备的早期数据传输信息例如可以包括以下一项或多项：源网络设备已经向候选第二网络设备进行了哪些数据包的早期数据传输，候选第二网络设备可以丢弃或忽略哪些早期数据传输的数据包。
示例地，目标网络设备可以通知第二网络设备可以丢弃或忽略哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：目标网络设备根据第二网络设备的早期数据传输信息，与第二网络设备进行早期数据传输。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：目标网络设备向源网络设备发送第二网络设备的标识信息。
因此，通过携带标识信息，可以知道切换前的哪个或哪些网络设备要保持之前已转移的数据，方案可行且简单。此外，在多个候选网络设备需要保持之前已转移的数据的情况 下，通过指示这些候选网络设备的标识，可以节省信令，节省资源。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：目标网络设备接收来自源网络设备的一个或多个网络设备的信息，其中，一个或多个网络设备包括第二网络设备，一个或多个网络设备为：终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前，为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，为终端设备提供服务的网络设备，一个或多个网络设备的信息包括以下一项或多项：一个或多个网络设备的标识信息、终端设备在一个或多个网络设备的标识信息。
因此，以切换前后均发生CPAC为例，目标网络设备可以根据切换之前的候选网络设备的信息，知道切换前后的候选网络设备是否相同。从而可以避免切换前后的候选网络设备相同时，在早期数据转移中对这些数据包再进行一次转移的发生，可以减少这些数据包的传输时延。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，一个或多个网络设备的信息包括一个或多个网络设备的标识信息，根据一个或多个网络设备的标识信息，确定N个第一网络设备包括第二网络设备。
因此，目标网络设备接收到源网络设备发送的切换之前为终端设备提供服务的网络设备或候选网络设备(即上述一个或多个网络设备)的标识信息后，目标网络设备可以基于该信息来决定选择哪些网络设备来为终端设备提供服务，或者目标网络设备也可以基于该信息来决定选择哪些候选网络设备，这样也可以尽量复用之前的早传数据，降低传输时延，提高用户体验。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，目标网络设备接收来自源网络设备的一个或多个网络设备的信息，包括：目标网络设备接收切换请求消息，切换请求消息中包括一个或多个网络设备的信息。
因此，在源网络设备向目标网络设备发送切换请求消息时，可以将切换前的网络设备(如候选网络设备)的信息通知给目标网络设备。从而目标网络设备通过接收携带切换前的网络设备(如候选网络设备)的信息的切换请求消息，可以确定要判断切换前后是否包括相同的网络设备。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，目标网络设备向第二网络设备发送终端设备在第二网络设备的标识信息。
示例地，目标网络设备向第二网络设备发送SN增加请求消息，该SN增加请求消息中包括终端设备在第二网络设备的标识信息。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：目标网络设备向源网络设备发送该N个第一网络设备的信息。
例如，目标网络设备向源网络设备发送该N个第一网络设备的标识信息。
第四方面，提供了一种数据传输的方法，该方法可以由网络设备执行，或者，也可以由用于网络设备的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定，为了便于描述，下面以由网络设备执行为例进行说明。
该方法可以包括：源网络设备确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括第二网络设备，其中，在终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备的情况下， 终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，第二网络设备属于为终端设备提供服务的网络设备；或者，在终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备的情况下，终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，第二网络设备属于为终端设备提供服务的网络设备；源网络设备向第二网络设备发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示使用第二网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。
上述方法可以由源网络设备(如源MN或者源SN)执行，或者，也可以由用于源网络设备(如源MN或者源SN)的芯片或电路执行。
示例地，源网络设备接收切换请求响应消息，根据切换请求响应消息确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括第二网络设备。
示例地，第三指示信息可以携带于释放请求消息中(如SN释放请求消息)。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，源网络设备确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括第二网络设备，包括：源网络设备接收来自目标网络设备的第二网络设备的标识信息；根据第二网络设备的标识信息，源网络设备确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括第二网络设备。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：源网络设备接收来自目标网络设备的N个第一网络设备的信息，N个第一网络设备为目标网络设备为终端设备配置的网络设备。
例如，源网络设备接收来自目标网络设备的N个第一网络设备的标识信息。
示例地，源网络设备可以根据N个第一网络设备的信息(如N个第一网络设备的标识信息)，来确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备是否包括切换前为终端设备配置的网络设备。如源网络设备可以根据N个第一网络设备的信息(如N个第一网络设备的标识信息)，来确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括第二网络设备。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：源网络设备向目标网络设备发送第二网络设备的早期数据传输信息。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：源网络设备向目标网络设备发送一个或多个网络设备的信息，其中，一个或多个网络设备包括第二网络设备，一个或多个网络设备为：终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前，为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，为终端设备提供服务的网络设备，一个或多个网络设备的信息包括以下一项或多项：一个或多个网络设备的标识信息、终端设备在一个或多个网络设备的标识信息。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，源网络设备向目标网络设备发送一个或多个网络设备的信息，包括：源网络设备向目标网络设备发送切换请求消息，切换请求消息中包括一个或多个网络设备的信息。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：源网络设备向目标网络设备或者第二网络设备发送待向终端设备发送的数据包。
第五方面，提供了一种数据传输的方法，该方法可以由网络设备执行，或者，也可以 由用于网络设备的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定，为了便于描述，下面以由网络设备执行为例进行说明。
该方法可以包括：第二网络设备接收来自源网络设备或者目标网络设备的第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示使用第二网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。其中，在终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备的情况下，终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，第二网络设备属于为终端设备提供服务的网络设备；或者，在终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备的情况下，终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，第二网络设备属于为终端设备提供服务的网络设备。
上述方法可以由第二网络设备执行，或者，也可以由用于第二网络设备的芯片或电路执行。
一示例，第二网络设备接收来自源网络设备的第三指示信息的情况下，该第三指示信息可以携带于释放请求消息中(如SN释放请求消息)。
又一示例，第二网络设备接收来自目标网络设备的第三指示信息的情况下，该第三指示信息可以携带于增加请求消息中(如SN增加请求消息)。
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些实现方式中，第二网络设备接收来自目标网络设备的终端设备在第二网络设备的标识信息。
示例地，第二网络设备接收来自目标网络设备的SN增加请求消息，该SN增加请求消息中包括终端设备在第二网络设备的标识信息。
结合第三方面至第五方面，在某些实现方式中，与终端设备相关的信息，包括以下一项或多项：终端设备的上下文信息、已向第二网络设备传输的终端设备的数据包、第二网络设备可以丢弃或忽略的终端设备的数据包的信息。
结合第三方面至第五方面，在某些实现方式中，目标网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备，源网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备；或者，目标网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备，源网络设备为载波聚合场景下的网络设备；或者，目标网络设备为载波聚合场景下的网络设备，源网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备。
第六方面，提供了一种数据传输的方法，该方法可以由网络设备执行，或者，也可以由用于网络设备的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定，为了便于描述，下面以由网络设备执行为例进行说明。
该方法可以包括：接收终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备的信息；确定终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括切换前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备；接收终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备的早期数据传输的信息。
以终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备 记为第二网络设备为例，该方法可以包括：接收第二网络设备的信息；确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括第二网络设备；接收第二网络设备的早期数据传输信息。
上述方法可以由目标网络设备(如目标MN或者目标SN)执行，或者，也可以由用于目标网络设备(如目标MN或者目标SN)的芯片或电路执行。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些实现方式中，候选网络设备的早期数据传输信息例如可以包括以下一项或多项：已经向候选网络设备进行了哪些数据包的早期数据转移(比如通过分组数据汇聚协议序列号(packet data convergence protocol sequence number，PDCP SN)或新空口用户面序列号(new radio user plane sequence number，NR-U SN)来指示)，候选网络设备可以丢弃或忽略哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：接收第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示使用切换前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些实现方式中，与终端设备相关的信息，包括以下一项或多项：终端设备的上下文信息、已向终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之切换前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备传输的终端设备的数据包、终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备可以丢弃或忽略的终端设备的数据包的信息。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：接收第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示丢弃或忽略早期数据传输的部分或全部数据包。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些实现方式中，第二指示信息包括一个或多个序列号的信息，一个或多个序列号的信息用于指示丢弃或忽略早期数据传输的部分或全部数据包。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些实现方式中，序列号为分组数据汇聚协议序列号或新空口用户面序列号。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些实现方式中，根据与切换前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备之间的早期数据传输情况，向切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备进行早期数据传输。
第七方面，提供了一种数据传输的方法，该方法可以由网络设备执行，或者，也可以由用于网络设备的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定，为了便于描述，下面以由网络设备执行为例进行说明。
该方法可以包括：发送终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备的信息；确定终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括切换前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备；发送终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备的早期数据传输信息。
以终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备记为第二网络设备为例，该方法可以包括：发送第二网络设备的信息；确定终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括第二网络设备；发送第二网络设备的早期数据传输信息。
上述方法可以由源网络设备(如源MN或者源SN)执行，或者，也可以由用于源网 络设备(如源MN或者源SN)的芯片或电路执行。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，候选网络设备的早期数据传输信息例如可以包括以下一项或多项：已经向候选网络设备进行了哪些数据包的早期数据转移(比如通过PDCP SN或NR-U序列号来指示)，候选网络设备可以丢弃或忽略哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示使用终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，与终端设备相关的信息，包括以下一项或多项：终端设备的上下文信息、已向终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备传输的终端设备的数据包、终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备可以丢弃或忽略的终端设备的数据包的信息。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示丢弃或忽略早期数据传输的部分或全部数据包。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，第二指示信息包括一个或多个序列号的信息，一个或多个序列号的信息用于指示丢弃或忽略早期数据传输的部分或全部数据包。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，序列号为分组数据汇聚协议序列号或新空口用户面序列号。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，根据与终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备之间的早期数据传输情况，向目标网络设备进行早期数据传输。
第八方面，提供了一种数据传输的方法，该方法可以由网络设备执行，或者，也可以由用于网络设备的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定，为了便于描述，下面以由网络设备执行为例进行说明。
该方法可以包括：接收终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的网络设备的信息；确定终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后为终端设备配置的候选网络设备包括切换前为终端设备配置的网络设备；接收终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的网络设备的早期数据传输信息。
以终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的网络设备记为第二网络设备为例，该方法可以包括：接收第二网络设备的信息；确定终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后为终端设备配置的候选网络设备包括第二网络设备；接收第二网络设备的早期数据传输信息。
上述方法可以由目标网络设备(如目标MN或者目标SN)执行，或者，也可以由用于目标网络设备(如目标MN或者目标SN)的芯片或电路执行。
第九方面，提供了一种数据传输的方法，该方法可以由网络设备执行，或者，也可以由用于网络设备的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定，为了便于描述，下面以由网络设备执行为例进行说明。
该方法可以包括：发送终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的网络设备的信息；确定终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后为终端设备配置的候选网络设备包括切换前为终端设备配置的网络设备；发送终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的网络设备的早期数据传输信息。
以终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前为终端设备配置的网络设备记为第二网络设备为例，该方法可以包括：发送第二网络设备的信息；确定终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后为终端设备配置的候选网络设备包括第二网络设备；发送第二网络设备的早期数据传输信息。
上述方法可以由源网络设备(如源MN或者源SN)执行，或者，也可以由用于源网络设备(如源MN或者源SN)的芯片或电路执行。
第十方面，提供一种通信装置，该装置用于执行上述第一方面至第九方面提供的方法。具体地，该装置可以包括用于执行第一方面至第九方面提供的方法的单元和/或模块，如处理单元和/或通信单元。
在一种实现方式中，该装置为网络设备。当该装置为网络设备时，所述通信单元可以是收发器，或，输入/输出接口；所述处理单元可以是处理器。
在另一种实现方式中，该装置为用于网络设备中的芯片、芯片系统或电路。当该装置为用于通信设备中的芯片、芯片系统或电路时，所述通信单元可以是该芯片、芯片系统或电路上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等；所述处理单元可以是处理器、处理电路或逻辑电路等。
可选地，上述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地，上述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。
第十一方面，提供一种通信装置，该装置包括：存储器，用于存储程序；处理器，用于执行存储器存储的程序，当存储器存储的程序被执行时，处理器用于执行上述第一方面至第九方面提供的方法。
在一种实现方式中，该装置为终端设备或网络设备。
在另一种实现方式中，该装置为用于终端设备或网络设备中的芯片、芯片系统或电路。
第十二方面，本申请提供一种处理器，用于执行上述各方面提供的方法。在执行这些方法的过程中，上述方法中有关发送上述信息和获取/接收上述信息的过程，可以理解为由处理器输出上述信息的过程，以及处理器接收输入的上述信息的过程。在输出上述信息时，处理器将该上述信息输出给收发器，以便由收发器进行发射。该上述信息在由处理器输出之后，还可能需要进行其他的处理，然后才到达收发器。类似的，处理器接收输入的上述信息时，收发器获取/接收该上述信息，并将其输入处理器。更进一步的，在收发器收到该上述信息之后，该上述信息可能需要进行其他的处理，然后才输入处理器。
基于上述原理，举例来说，前述方法中提及的获取切换前的第二网络设备的信息可以理解为处理器接收输入的信息。
对于处理器所涉及的发射、发送和获取/接收等操作，如果没有特殊说明，或者，如果未与其在相关描述中的实际作用或者内在逻辑相抵触，则均可以更加一般性的理解为处理器输出和接收、输入等操作，而不是直接由射频电路和天线所进行的发射、发送和接收操作。
在实现过程中，上述处理器可以是专门用于执行这些方法的处理器，也可以是执行存储器中的计算机指令来执行这些方法的处理器，例如通用处理器。上述存储器可以为非瞬时性(non-transitory)存储器，例如只读存储器(Read Only Memory，ROM)，其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上，也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上，本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。
第十三方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读介质存储用于设备执行的程序代码，该程序代码包括用于执行上述第一方面至第九方面提供的方法。
第十四方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第九方面提供的方法。
第十五方面，提供一种芯片，所述芯片包括处理器与通信接口，所述处理器通过所述通信接口读取存储器上存储的指令，执行上述第一方面至第九方面提供的方法。
可选地，作为一种实现方式，所述芯片还可以包括存储器，所述存储器中存储有指令，所述处理器用于执行所述存储器上存储的指令，当所述指令被执行时，所述处理器用于执行上述第一方面至第九方面提供的方法。
第十六方面，提供一种通信系统，包括上文所述的主网络设备和候选网络设备。
第十七方面，提供一种通信系统，包括上文所述的源网络设备和目标网络设备；或者，源网络设备和第二网络设备；或者，目标网络设备和第二网络设备；或者，源网络设备、目标网络设备，以及第二网络设备。
附图说明
图1示出了CU和DU的架构示意图。
图2示出了适用于本申请实施例的无线通信系统200的一示意图。
图3示出了适用于本申请实施例的无线通信系统300的一示意图。
图4示出了适用于本申请实施例的一种DC控制面架构示意图。
图5示出了EN-DC中网络侧的对于MCG bearer、SCG bearer和split bearer的协议栈示意图。
图6示出了NGEN-DC/NE-DC/NR-DC中网络侧的对于MCG bearer、SCG bearer和split bearer的协议栈示意图。
图7是本申请一实施例提供的一种数据传输的方法的示意图。
图8是本申请另一实施例提供的一种数据传输的方法的示意图。
图9是适用于本申请一实施例的CPA流程的示意图。
图10是适用于本申请一实施例的MN触发的CPC流程的示意图。
图11是适用于本申请一实施例的SN触发的CPC流程的示意图。
图12是适用于本申请另一实施例的切换前配置了CPAC，之后发生了MN切换的场景的示意性流程图。
图13是适用于本申请另一实施例的切换前配置了CPC，之后发生了SN切换的场景的示意性流程图。
图14是适用于本申请另一实施例的切换前未配置CPAC，之后发生了MN切换的场景的示意性流程图。
图15是根据本申请实施例提供的数据传输的装置的示意性框图。
图16是根据本申请实施例提供的数据传输的装置的另一示意性框图。
图17是本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：第五代(5th generation，5G)系统或新无线(new radio，NR)、长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)等。本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于未来的通信系统，如第六代移动通信系统。本申请实施例的技术方案还可以应用于设备到设备(device to device，D2D)通信，车辆外联(vehicle-to-everything，V2X)通信，机器到机器(machine to machine，M2M)通信，机器类型通信(machine type communication，MTC)，以及物联网(internet of things，IoT)通信系统或者其他通信系统。
本申请实施例中的终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment，UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台(mobile station，MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal，MT)、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。本申请实施例中的终端设备可以是指向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备，可以用于连接人、物和机，例如具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。本申请的实施例中的终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device，MID)、可穿戴设备，虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等。可选地，UE可以用于充当基站。例如，UE可以充当调度实体，其在V2X或D2D等中的UE之间提供侧行链路信号。比如，蜂窝电话和汽车利用侧行链路信号彼此通信。蜂窝电话和智能家居设备之间通信，而无需通过基站中继通信信号。
本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备，该网络设备也可以称为接入网设备或无线接入网设备，如网络设备可以是基站。本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是指将终端设备接入到无线网络的无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)节点(或设备)。基站可以广义的覆盖如下中的各种名称，或与如下名称进行替换，比如：节点B(NodeB)、演进型基站(evolved NodeB，eNB)、下一代基站(next generation NodeB，gNB)、中继站、接入点、传输点(transmitting and receiving point，TRP)、发射点(transmitting point，TP)、主站MeNB、辅站SeNB、多制式无线(MSR)节点、家庭基站、网络控制器、接入节点、无线节点、接入点(AP)、传输节点、收发节点、基带单元(BBU)、射频拉远单元(RRU)、有源天线单元(AAU)、射频头(RRH)、中心单元(central unit，CU)、分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)、定位节点等。基站可以是宏基站、微基站、中继节点、施主节点或类似物，或其组合。基站还可以指用于设置于前述设备或装置内的 通信模块、调制解调器或芯片。基站还可以是移动交换中心以及设备到设备(Device-to-Device，D2D)、车辆外联(vehicle-to-everything，V2X)、机器到机器(machine-to-machine，M2M)通信中承担基站功能的设备、6G网络中的网络侧设备、未来的通信系统中承担基站功能的设备等。基站可以支持相同或不同接入技术的网络。本申请的实施例对网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。
基站可以是固定的，也可以是移动的。例如，直升机或无人机可以被配置成充当移动基站，一个或多个小区可以根据该移动基站的位置移动。在其他示例中，直升机或无人机可以被配置成用作与另一基站通信的设备。
在一些部署中，本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是指CU或者DU，或者，网络设备包括CU和DU。gNB还可以包括有源天线单元(active antenna unit，AAU)。作为示例性说明，参见图1，图1示出了CU和DU架构的示意图。CU实现gNB的部分功能，DU实现gNB的部分功能。比如，CU负责处理非实时协议和服务，实现无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)层，分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层的功能。DU负责处理物理层协议和实时服务，实现无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层、媒体接入控制(medium access control，MAC)层和物理(physical，PHY)层的功能。AAU实现部分物理层处理功能、射频处理及有源天线的相关功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息，或者，由PHY层的信息转变而来，因而，在这种架构下，高层信令，如RRC层信令，也可以认为是由DU发送的，或者，由DU+AAU发送的。可以理解的是，网络设备可以为包括CU节点、DU节点、AAU节点中一项或多项的设备。此外，可以将CU划分为接入网(radio access network，RAN)中的网络设备，也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network，CN)中的网络设备，本申请对此不做限定。
进一步地，CU还可以划分为控制面的中央单元(central unit-control plane，CU-CP)和用户面的中央单元(central unit-user plane，CU-UP)。其中，CU-CP和CU-UP也可以部署在不同的物理设备上，CU-CP负责控制面功能，主要包含RRC层和PDCP-C层。PDCP-C层主要负责控制面数据的加解密，完整性保护，数据传输等。CU-UP负责用户面功能，主要包含服务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol，SDAP)层和PDCP-U层。其中SDAP层主要负责将核心网的数据进行处理并将流(flow)映射到承载。PDCP-U层主要负责数据面的加解密，完整性保护，头压缩，序列号维护，数据传输等至少一种功能。具体地，CU-CP和CU-UP通过通信接口(例如，E1接口)连接。CU-CP代表网络设备通过通信接口(例如，Ng接口)和核心网设备连接，通过通信接口(例如，F1-C(控制面)接口)和DU连接。CU-UP通过通信接口(例如，F1-U(用户面)接口)和DU连接。
还有一种可能的实现，PDCP-C层也包含在CU-UP中。
可以理解的是，以上关于CU和DU，以及CU-CP和CU-UP的协议层划分仅为示例，也可能有其他的划分方式，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
本申请实施例所提及的网络设备可以为包括CU、或DU、或包括CU和DU的设备、或者控制面CU节点(CU-CP节点)和用户面CU节点(CU-UP节点)以及DU节点的设备。
网络设备和终端设备可以部署在陆地上，包括室内或室外、手持或车载；也可以部署 在水面上；还可以部署在空中的飞机、气球和卫星上。本申请实施例中对网络设备和终端设备所处的场景不做限定。
本申请中的一些实施例还涉及核心网设备。具体地，核心网设备是指为终端设备提供业务支持的核心网(core network，CN)中的设备。目前，一些核心网设备的举例为：接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function，AMF)实体、会话管理功能(session management function，SMF)实体、用户面功能(user plane function，UPF)实体等等，此处不一一列举。其中，AMF实体可以负责终端设备的接入管理和移动性管理。SMF实体可以负责会话管理，如终端设备的会话建立等。UPF实体可以是用户面的功能实体，主要负责连接外部网络。需要说明的是，本申请中实体也可以称为网元或功能实体，例如，AMF实体也可以称为AMF网元或AMF功能实体；又例如，SMF实体也可以称为SMF网元或SMF功能实体等。
应理解，上述命名仅为便于区分不同的功能而定义，不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除在5G网络以及未来其它的网络中采用其他命名的可能。例如，在6G网络中，上述各个网元中的部分或全部可以沿用5G中的术语，也可能采用其他名称等。
为便于理解本申请实施例，首先结合图2和图3详细说明适用于本申请实施例的通信系统。
作为示例性说明，参见图2，图2示出了适用于本申请实施例的无线通信系统200的一示意图。如图2所示，该无线通信系统200可以包括至少一个网络设备，例如图2所示的网络设备210，该无线通信系统200还可以包括至少一个终端设备，例如图2所示的终端设备220。网络设备和终端设备均可配置多个天线，网络设备与终端设备可使用多天线技术通信。
其中，网络设备和终端设备通信时，网络设备可以管理一个或多个小区，一个小区中可以有整数个终端设备。可选地，网络设备210和终端设备220组成一个单小区通信系统，不失一般性，将小区记为小区#1。网络设备210可以是小区#1中的网络设备，或者说，网络设备210可以为小区#1中的终端设备(例如终端设备220)服务。
需要说明的是，小区可以理解为网络设备的无线信号覆盖范围内的区域。
应理解，图2仅为便于理解而示例的简化示意图，该无线通信系统200中还可以包括其他网络设备或者还可以包括其他终端设备，图2中未予以画出。
本申请提供的方法还可以应用于双连接(dual connectivity，DC)场景。为便于理解，先以终端设备为UE，网络设备为基站为例，并结合图3，对DC场景进行介绍。
在无线网络中，一个UE可能和多个基站通信，即双连接(dual connectivity，DC)，也称为多无线双连接(multi-radio dual connectivity，MR-DC)，为统一，下文用DC表示。这多个基站可能是属于同一无线接入技术(radio access technology，RAT)的基站(比如都是4G基站，或者都是5G基站)，也可能是不同RAT的基站(比如一个是第四代4G基站，一个是第五代5G基站)。
作为示例性说明，参见图3，图3示出了适用于本申请实施例的无线通信系统300的另一示意图。参见图3，UE 320可以通过DC技术与基站311和基站312通信，基站311和基站312共同接入核心网330。核心网330可能是4G核心网，也可能是5G核心网。
网络侧可以利用多个基站的资源为UE提供通信服务，从而为UE提供高速率传输。 DC场景下，对于某个UE而言，与核心网有控制面信令交互的基站称为主节点(master node，MN)，其他基站称为辅节点(secondary node，SN)。MN有时也可称为主基站，SN有时也可称为辅基站。各个基站具有不同的RLC实体和MAC实体。DC场景下，数据无线承载(data radio bearer，DRB)可以分为以下三种：主小区组承载(master cell group bearer，MCG bearer)、辅小区组承载(secondary cell group bearer，SCG bearer)、分裂承载(split bearer)。其中，MCG bearer指的是该DRB的RLC实体和MAC实体在主基站上，SCG bearer指的是该DRB的RLC实体和MAC实体在辅基站上，split bearer指的是该DRB的RLC和MAC实体在主基站和辅基站上都有。类似地，对于PDCP终结在MN上的承载，可以称为MN终止的承载(MN terminated bearer)，即下行(downlink，DL)数据从核心网直接到达MN，经由MN的PDCP/SDAP处理后再经过MN或者SN的RLC/MAC发送给UE，上行(uplink，UL)数据从MN的PDCP/SDAP处理后发送给核心网。对于PDCP终结在SN上的承载，可以称为SN终止的承载(SN terminated bearer)，即DL数据从核心网直接到达SN，经由SN的PDCP/SDAP处理后再经过MN或者SN的RLC/MAC发送给UE，UL数据从SN的PDCP/SDAP处理后发送给核心网。可以理解，在有些情况下，如当终端设备连接到5G核心网时，存在协议层SDAP。
另外，双连接中，主基站和辅基站都具有RRC实体，都可以产生RRC消息(即控制消息，比如测量消息等)。作为示例性说明，参见图4，图4示出了适用于本申请实施例的一种DC控制面架构示意图。主基站和核心网之间通过通信接口(例如，NG-C接口)通信、主基站和辅基站之间通过通信接口(例如，Xn-C接口)通信、主基站和UE之间通过通信接口(例如，Uu接口)通信、辅基站和UE之间通过通信接口(例如，Uu接口)通信。
辅基站可以直接把辅基站产生的RRC消息发给UE，这种情况下UE给辅基站发送的RRC消息也是直接发给辅基站。辅基站与UE之间直接交互的RRC消息称为信令无线承载3(signalling radio bearer，SRB3)。或者，辅基站可以把产生的RRC消息通知主基站，主基站再发送给UE，这种情况下，UE把给辅基站的RRC消息通过主基站转给辅基站。对于一个处于DC场景下的UE而言，辅基站的用户面可能和主基站连接的核心网有连接，即核心网可以直接通过辅基站给UE发送数据。
应理解，本申请涉及到的设备之间的接口(如主基站和辅基站之间可以通过Xn-C接口通信)仅是示例性说明，其不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。
本申请适用的场景可以包括下述DC类型：演进的通用陆基无线接入和新无线双连接(E-UTRA-NR dual connectivity，EN-DC)、下一代无线接入网演进的通用陆基无线接入和新无线双连接(NG-RAN E-UTRA-NR dual connectivity，NGEN-DC)、新无线和演进的通用陆基无线接入双连接(NR-E-UTRA dual connectivity，NE-DC)、新无线和新无线双连接(NR-NR dual connectivity，NR-DC)。
EN-DC中，主基站为连接到4G核心网的LTE基站(例如eNB)，辅基站为NR基站(例如gNB)。
NGEN-DC中，主基站为连接5G核心网的LTE基站，辅基站为NR基站。
NE-DC中，主基站为连接到5G核心网的NR基站，辅基站为LTE基站。EN-DC有时也称为NSA，因为5G开始阶段，EN-DC网络中UE并不能驻留在NR小区。能驻留 UE的NR基站有时也称为SA NR基站。
NR-DC中，主基站为连接到5G核心网的NR基站，辅基站为NR基站。
作为示例性说明，参见图5，图5示出了EN-DC中网络侧的对于MCG bearer、SCG bearer和split bearer的协议栈示意图。作为示例性说明，参见图6，图6示出了NGEN-DC/NE-DC/NR-DC中网络侧的对于MCG bearer、SCG bearer和split bearer的协议栈示意图。从图5和图6可以看出，每个承载的传输需要经由RLC/MAC和PDCP/SDAP。
UE在一个基站下可以同时接收多个小区的服务。MN为UE提供的服务小区组可以称为主小区组(master cell group，MCG)，MCG包括一个或多个小区(cell)。SN为UE提供的服务小区组可以称为辅小区组(secondary cell group，SCG)，SCG包括一个或多个cell。当MCG中仅有一个cell时，该cell为UE的主小区(primary cell，PCell)。当SCG中仅有一个cell时，该cell为UE的主辅小区(primary SCG cell，PSCell)。在NR中为了归一化各种名词，将PCell和PSCell统称为特别小区(special cell，SpCell)。MCG或SCG中有多个小区时，除了SpCell的小区可以称为辅小区(secondary cell，SCell)。MCG或SCG中的SCell与SpCell可以进行载波聚合，共同为UE提供传输资源。
应理解，本申请的应用场景不限于上述DC场景，本申请还适用于其他系统的DC场景，如5G基站和WIFI组成的DC场景，或者部署为授权频谱的基站和部署为非授权频谱的基站组成的DC场景。
为便于理解本申请实施例，对本申请实施例中涉及的几个基本概念做简单说明。应理解，下文中所介绍的基本概念是以目前协议中规定的基本概念为例进行简单说明，但并不限定本申请实施例只能够应用于现有的通信系统中。因此，以现有的通信系统为例描述时出现的标准名称，都是功能性描述，具体名称并不限定。
1、载波聚合(carrier aggregation，CA)：为单个终端设备配置多个载波(小区)共同进行数据传输的技术。
2、主小区PCell：部署在主频点的小区(或者说，工作在主载波上的小区)。PCell是终端设备发起初始连接建立过程或发起连接重建过程对应的小区，即终端设备在某个小区发起初始连接建立过程或发起连接重建过程，则把该小区称为PCell。在切换过程中，一个小区可以被指示为PCell。
3、主辅小区PSCell：是终端设备在SCG中进行随机接入或初始物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel，PUSCH)传输(例如当执行SCG改变的时候且无需随机接入过程时UE发起初始PUSCH传输)的小区，或者SCG小区中终端设备执行同步的重配过程中进行随机接入的小区。
4、辅小区SCell：是工作在辅载波上的小区。一旦RRC连接建立，SCell就可能被配置，以提供额外的无线资源。在双连接系统中，MCG和SCG中除PCell和PSCell外的小区，均可称为SCell。
应理解，有些地方也把PSCell称为SCell，即SCell也包括PSCell。
5、服务小区(serving cell)：处于RRC连接(RRC_CONNECTED)态的终端设备，如果没有配置载波聚合或双连接，则仅有一个服务小区，即PCell；如果配置了载波聚合或双连接，则该终端设备的服务小区可以认为是由PCell、PSCell和所有SCell组成。
应理解，关于上述PCell、PSCell和所有SCell，仅是一种示例，在未来协议中，用于 表示相同功能的含义，都适用于本申请实施例。
还应理解，每个载波(component carrier，CC)对应一个独立的小区。在一种可能的设计中，配置了载波聚合或双连接的终端设备可以与1个PCell和至多31个SCell相连。终端设备的PCell、PSCell和所有SCell组成了该终端设备的服务小区集合。终端设备的服务小区可以指代PCell，也可以指代PSCell，也可以指代SCell。
在双连接中，一般而言，由于终端设备的移动性，网络侧会触发PSCell的改变(即网络侧通知终端设备，从一个PSCell切换到另外一个PSCell，通知改变之后的PSCell对应配置信息)。例如，网络侧基于终端设备的测量结果获得一个PSCell的信号质量变差，另外一个PSCell的信号质量变好，从而网络侧通知终端设备进行PSCell改变。应理解，PSCell改变可能是终端设备从一个SN的小区切换到另外一个SN的小区，也可能是终端设备从一个SN的小区切换到该SN的另外一个小区。此外，该PSCell的改变可能是MN触发(trigger)的，即由MN确定(或者说发起(initiated))从一个PSCell切换到另外一个PSCell，也可能是SN触发的，即由SN确定(或者说发起)从一个PSCell切换到另外一个PSCell。
一种基于条件的PSCell增加或改变(conditional PSCell addition/change，CPAC)方法是：网络侧事先配置多个候选PSCell，通知终端设备该多个候选PSCell的配置以及每个候选PSCell对应的条件，后续当终端设备判断存在候选PSCell满足其对应的条件时，该终端设备可以直接接入到该满足条件的候选PSCell。这样，网络侧无需等待终端设备上报测量报告之后再向终端设备下发新的PSCell配置，能够缩短增加或改变PSCell所需的时延。此外，针对SN触发改变PSCell的场景，能够避免PSCell信号质量快速改变时，无法通过SRB3上报测量报告和下发重配消息，因此，提高了PSCell改变的鲁棒性。
可以理解的，本申请中所述的CPAC是一个统称，在本申请中，CPAC可以指的是基于条件的增加和/或条件改变PSCell的配置。
在CPAC中，虽然终端设备可以根据存在候选PSCell满足其对应的条件时，直接接入到该满足条件的候选PSCell，从而能够缩短增加或改变PSCell所需的时延。但是终端设备接入到候选PSCell之后，候选PSCell并不能立即给终端设备发送数据，需要等终端设备接入到候选PSCell前的设备把数据的包发送给候选PSCell之后才能给终端设备发送数据，这增加了这些数据包的传输时延。
本申请实施例提供一种方案，可以缩短数据传输的时延。
需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中，切换过程主要包括与CPAC相关的过程，如包括增加PSCell或变更PSCell。
下面将结合附图详细说明本申请提供的各个实施例。
图7是本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输的方法700的示意图。方法700可以包括如下步骤。
710，主网络设备进行和候选网络设备之间的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变过程。
其中，主网络设备例如可以为MN，候选网络设备和辅网络设备例如可以为SN。
在步骤710中，主接入网设备或辅接入网可以触发为终端设备配置基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变。也就是说，主接入网设备或辅接入网触发候选网络设备事先配置多个候选PSCell，然后主接入网设备可以通知终端设备该多个候选PSCell的配置以及每个候 选PSCell对应的触发条件，后续当终端设备判断存在候选PSCell满足其对应的触发条件时，该终端设备可以直接接入到该满足条件的候选PSCell，当有多个候选PSCell满足其对应的触发条件时，该终端设备具体接入哪个满足条件的候选PSCell，可以基于其系统的需要进行相应的设计，比如，由终端设备自己决定，任意选择一个，或是，选择之前接入过的，在此不予限定。
应理解，图7主要是为便于理解，以主网络设备和一个候选网络设备为例进行说明，本申请实施例对候选网络设备的数量不作限定。例如，在实际中可能包括更多数量的候选网络设备。
720，主网络设备向候选网络设备发送一个或多个数据包，该一个或多个数据包包括：为终端设备配置的MN终止的SCG bearer上的数据包，和/或，为终端设备配置的MN终止的split bearer上的数据包。
也就是说，在步骤720中，主网络设备可以向候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送一个或多个数据包，即一个或多个下行数据包。候选PSCell所属的网络设备，即候选网络设备，例如可以为候选SN。
一种可能的方式，在步骤720中，主网络设备向候选PSCell所属的网络设备进行早期数据传输。早期数据传输是指在终端设备接入候选PSCell之前，向候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送该一个或多个数据包。
主网络设备向候选网络设备发送的该一个或多个数据包的形式可以为分组数据汇聚层协议的协议数据单元(protocol data unit，PDU)(PDCP PDU)。
在本申请实施例中，主网络设备可以向候选网络设备早期数据传输MN终止的SCG bearer上的数据包，主网络设备还可以向候选网络设备早期数据传输MN终止的split bearer上的数据包。
其中，MN终止的SCG bearer上的数据包，即表示该数据包对应的DRB的RLC实体和MAC实体在SN上，PDCP实体在MN上。类似地，MN终止的split bearer上的数据包，即表示该数据包对应的DRB的RLC实体和MAC实体在SN上和MN上都有，PDCP实体在MN上。也就是说，在早期数据传输中，MN终止的SCG bearer或MN终止的split bearer上的数据包，是由MN的PDCP/SDAP处理的。
应理解，本申请实施例对于候选网络设备(如候选SN)是否部署PDCP层或者是否支持PDCP层的功能不作限定。
在本申请中，关于MN终止的SCG bearer或MN终止的split bearer，早期数据传输也可以称为早期数据转移，或者也可以为其他名称，其命名不对本申请实施例保护范围造成限定。下文，为统一，将CPAC中主网络设备或辅网络设备与候选网络设备的数据转移，均记为早期数据转移。
可选地，方法700还可以包括步骤730。
730，终端设备接入候选网络设备之后，候选网络设备向终端设备发送该一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包。
也就是说，终端设备接入到候选网络设备之后，候选网络设备可以向终端设备发送已经转移过来的数据，从而可以减少数据传输的时延。
通过本申请实施例，主网络设备与候选网络设备(如MN与候选SN)之间可以进行 早期数据转移，这样终端设备接入到候选网络设备之后，候选网络设备可以向终端设备发送已经转移过来的数据，从而可以减少数据传输的时延。此外，对于MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer，主网络设备也可以向候选网络设备进行早期数据转移，如通过PDCP PDU的形式进行早期数据转移。因此，本申请实施例可以支持MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer的数据包的早期数据转移，可以减少这些承载中数据的传输时延。
可选地，主网络设备还可以向候选网络设备(即候选PSCell所属的网络设备)发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略该一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包。例如，MN可以向候选SN发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略早期数据转移的部分或全部数据包。这样，候选网络设备可以根据早期数据转移的数据以及该指示信息#1，向终端设备发送数据。在该情况下，候选网络设备可能向终端设备发送该一个或多个数据包中的部分数据包。作为示例而非限定，候选网络设备可以把指示丢弃的数据包丢弃，或者也可以直接忽略这些数据包。比如在主网络设备向终端设备发送CPAC配置之后，主网络设备或辅网络设备会继续向终端设备发送数据，从而从向终端设备发送CPAC配置到终端设备接入候选PSCell之间，主网络设备或辅网络设备可能已经把一部分数据包成功发送给终端设备，为了避免在终端设备接入到候选PSCell之后，候选网络设备把这些成功发送给终端设备的数据包再次发送给终端设备，主网络设备或辅网络设备会通知候选网络设备丢弃或忽略一些已经成功发送给终端设备的数据包。
通过该方式，可以避免候选网络设备中保留或者候选网络设备向终端设备重复发送一些终端设备已成功接收的数据包，可以减少资源浪费。
在本申请实施例中，为区分，用指示信息#1表示用于指示丢弃或忽略早期数据转移的部分或全部数据包的信息。
其中，关于指示信息#1的发送时机不作限定。示例地，可以在满足预设条件的情况下，发送指示信息#1。预设条件，可以是关于时间上的限定(如周期性发送)，或者也可以是关于数据量的限定(如数据量与门限值或门限范围的比较)，或者也可以是其他方面的限定。
此外，关于指示信息#1的形式也不作限定。一可能的形式，指示信息#1可以为一个或多个序列号(sequence number，SN)的形式。在本申请中，多次提及序列号，关于序列号的具体形式不作限定。例如，序列号可以为分组数据汇聚协议序列号(packet data convergence protocol sequence number，PDCP SN)，或者也可以为新空口用户面序列号(new radio user plane sequence number，NR-U SN)，或者也可以为其他序列号，对此不作限定。对此，下文不再说明。
关于指示信息#1的发送方式，也不作限定。例如，指示信息#1可以通过主网络设备与候选网络设备之间的用户面发送，也可以通过主网络设备与候选网络设备之间的控制面发送(如主网络设备向候选网络设备发送一个消息，比如主网络设备在早期状态转移(early status transfer)消息中携带指示信息#1)。
以指示信息#1过主网络设备与候选网络设备之间的用户面发送为例。例如，主网络设备通过用户面给候选网络设备发送的数据中携带需要丢弃或忽略的数据包对应的序列号，比如携带一个PDCP SN，指示丢弃或忽略该序列号之前的所有数据包，包括该序号 号对应的数据包。又如，携带指示信息，指示对应多个块(block)对应的数据包，比如指示信息包括块的数目，以及每一块中第一个需要丢弃或忽略的数据包对应的PDCP SN以及该块对应的数据包的个数，每一个块对应连续的一些PDCP SN对应的数据包。
关于指示信息#1的具体内容，下文结合图9所示的方法900详细介绍。
可选地，主网络设备还可以向候选网络设备(即PSCell所在的网络设备)发送指示信息#2，指示信息#2用于指示进行MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer的早期数据传输。例如，MN可以向候选SN发送指示信息#2，指示进行MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer的早期数据传输。在主网络设备向候选网络设备发送指示信息#2之后，可以与候选网络设备进行MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer的早期数据传输。
在本申请实施例中，为区分，用指示信息#2表示用于指示进行MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer的早期数据传输。
其中，该指示信息#2可以通过主网络设备与候选网络设备的控制面接口发送，也可以通过主网络设备与候选网络设备之间的用户面接口发送，对此不作限定。
此外，关于指示的形式，可以是通过指示信息#2中的具体内容指示，或者也可以是通过发送指示信息#2的动作指示，对此不作限定。以通过发送指示信息#2的动作指示为例，作为示例而非限定，可以预先约定或预先配置某个字段，当发送该字段时，说明进行MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer的早期数据传输。
关于适用于方法700的具体流程，下文结合图9-11所示的实施例说明。
图8是本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输的方法800的示意图。方法800可以包括如下步骤。
810，目标网络设备确定为终端设备配置N个第一网络设备，N个第一网络设备包括第二网络设备。
其中，N为大于1或等于1的整数。
在本申请实施例中，为区分，用目标网络设备表示切换后的网络设备，源网络设备表示切换前的网络设备，其中，网络设备例如可以为MN、SN等。例如，从源MN切换到目标MN；又如，从源SN切换到目标SN；又如，从源MN切换到目标MN，且从源SN切换到目标SN。
目标网络设备确定为终端设备配置N个第一网络设备，该N个第一网络设备可以包括：为终端设备提供服务的网络设备，和/或，候选网络设备。切换后，如果该N个第一网络设备包括第二网络设备，切换后该第二网络设备可能是为终端设备提供服务的网络设备，也可能是候选网络设备。
在本申请中，切换前，即表示终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前，也就是说，为终端设备提供服务的网络设备从源网络设备变为目标网络设备之前，或者为终端设备配置的候选网络设备从源网络设备变为目标网络设备之前，或者为终端设备提供服务的网络设备或者为终端设备配置的候选网络设备改变之前。切换后，即表示终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之后，也就是说，为终端设备提供服务的网络设备从源网络设备变为目标网络设备之后，或者为终端设备配置的候选网络设备从源网络设备变为目标网络设备之后，或者为终端设备提供服务的网络设备或者为终端设备配置的候选网络设备 改变之后。下文为简洁，用切换前和切换后进行描述。
关于切换前和切换后的第二网络设备可以属于以下情况。
一可能的情况，切换后的第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备。
例如，在切换后为基于条件的主辅小区(primary secondary cell group cell，PSCell)增加(conditional PSCell addition，CPA)/基于条件的主辅小区(primary secondary cell group cell，PSCell)改变(conditional PSCell change，CPC)的场景下，目标网络设备决定配置的候选网络设备和切换之前的网络设备(如切换之前是为终端设备提供服务的网络设备，或者切换之前是为终端设备配置的候选网络设备)部分或全部相同。也就是说，目标网络设备决定配置的候选网络设备包括切换之前为终端设备配置的网络设备，即第二网络设备。
其中，第二网络设备在切换之前可能是为终端设备提供服务的网络设备，如第二网络设备在切换之前属于DC场景中的网络设备，比如辅网络设备；或者第二网络设备在切换之前也可能是为终端设备配置的候选网络设备，如第二网络设备在切换之前属于CPA/CPC场景中的网络设备。
又一可能的情况，切换前的第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备。
例如，在切换前为CPA/CPC的场景下，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的候选网络设备。在切换后，第二网络设备可能为候选网络设备，也可能为终端设备提供服务的网络设备。
一示例，在切换后为CPA/CPC的场景下，目标网络设备决定配置的候选网络设备和切换之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备部分或全部相同。也就是说，目标网络设备决定配置的候选网络设备包括切换之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备，即第二网络设备。
又一示例，在切换后为DC的场景下，目标网络设备(比如主网络设备)决定配置的网络设备(比如辅网络设备)和切换之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备部分或全部相同。也就是说，目标网络设备决定配置的网络设备包括切换之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备，即第二网络设备。
又一可能的情况，切换前和切换后，第二网络设备均属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备。
例如，在切换前为CPA/CPC的场景下，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的候选网络设备。在切换后为CPA/CPC的场景下，目标网络设备决定配置的候选网络设备和切换之前为终端设备配置的候选网络设备部分或全部相同。
应理解，上述三种可能的情况仅是示例性说明，属于上述任一情况的变形，都适用于本申请实施例。例如，N个第一网络设备包括多个第二网络设备，即目标网络设备可以决定保持切换之前为终端设备配置的多个第二网络设备。
切换后，目标网络设备确定为终端设备配置的N个第一网络设备中包括切换前为终端设备配置的网络设备的情况下，那么可以利用之前早期数据转移中转移的数据，或者说可以减少一些不必要的数据转移。例如，目标网络设备可以通过发送指示信息，如记为指示信息#3，用于指示使用或者说保持第二网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。
其中，第二网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息，例如可以包括以下中的一项或多项：第二网络设备中终端设备的上下文、已向第二网络设备传输的终端设备的数据包、第二网络设备可以丢弃或忽略的数据包的信息。其中，第二网络设备可以丢弃的数据包，即表示第二网络设备中之前早期数据转移的数据包中可以丢弃的数据包。作为示例而非限定，指示信息#3可以用于指示保持第二网络设备中终端设备的上下文。或者，指示信息#3可以用于指示使用或者保持第二网络设备的早期数据转移的信息。第二网络设备早期数据转移的信息包括：第二网络设备中之前进行的早期数据转移的数据包(即已向第二网络设备传输的终端设备的数据包)，和/或，第二网络设备可以丢弃或忽略的数据包的信息。
在本申请实施例中，为区分，用指示信息#3表示用于指示使用或保持切换前为终端设备配置的某些网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。关于具体如何指示，可以是通过指示信息#3中的具体内容指示，或者也可以是通过发送指示信息#3的动作指示，本申请实施例对此不作限定。
一示例，可以通过指示信息#3中的具体内容指示使用或保持切换前为终端设备配置的某些网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。
例如，假设协议预定义指示信息#3的功能为使用或保持切换前为终端设备配置的某些网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。如可以通过1比特的字段来指示使用或保持切换前为终端设备配置的某些网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。其中，0对应使用或保持切换前为终端设备配置的某些网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息，1对应不使用或不需要保持切换前为终端设备配置的某些网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息，或者释放切换前为终端设备配置的某些网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。
又如，可以通过1比特的字段来指示指示信息#3用于指示保持第二网络设备中终端设备的上下文，还是用于指示使用或者保持第二网络设备的早期数据转移的信息。其中，0对应指示信息#3用于指示保持第二网络设备中终端设备的上下文，1对应指示信息#3用于指示使用或者保持第二网络设备的早期数据转移的信息。
又一示例，可以通过发送指示信息#3的动作指示使用或保持切换前为终端设备配置的某些网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。例如可以设计专用于指示使用或保持切换前为终端设备配置的某些网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息，当收到该信息时，确定需要使用或保持切换前为终端设备配置的某些网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息；当没有收到该信息时，确定不使用或不需要保持切换前为终端设备配置的某些网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息，或者释放切换前为终端设备配置的某些网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。
方法800可以包括步骤8201或步骤8202。
8201，目标网络设备向第二网络设备发送指示信息#3。
在步骤8201中，目标网络设备向第二网络设备发送指示信息#3。第二网络设备接收到该指示信息#3后，第二网络设备可以根据该指示信息#3，可以确定不需要释放之前早期数据转移转移的数据包。第二网络设备使用与终端设备相关的信息，即可以表示第二网络设备保持或者说保留之前早期数据转移转移的数据包。或者，第二网络设备在收到指示信息#3之前，如果第二网络设备接收到指示信息#1，如第二网络设备从源网络设备接收到指示信息#1，即指示丢弃或忽略部分或全部数据包的指示信息，那么第二网络设备可以根据早期数据转移转移的数据包以及指示信息#1，确定保持或者说保留哪些数据包，或者 确定将要向终端设备发送哪些数据包。
8202，目标网络设备向源网络设备发送指示信息#3。
在步骤8202中，目标网络设备向源网络设备发送指示信息#3。源网络设备接收到该指示信息#3后，可以确定第二网络设备不需要释放之前早期数据转移转移的数据包。示例地，源网络设备可以继续向第二网络设备转移数据包，后续第二网络设备可以向终端设备发送转移的数据包。源网络设备还可以向第二网络设备发送指示信息#1，即指示丢弃或忽略部分或全部数据包。
此外，源网络设备还可以向第二网络设备转发该指示信息#3。第二网络设备根据该指示信息#3，可以确定第二网络设备不需要释放之前早期数据转移转移的数据包。源网络设备向第二网络设备发送的指示信息#3，和源网络设备接收的来自目标网络设备的指示信息#3可能相同，也可能不同，对此不作限定。一示例，源网络设备向第二网络设备发送的指示信息#3，和源网络设备接收的来自目标网络设备的指示信息#3不同。例如，源网络设备接收的来自目标网络设备的指示信息#3用于指示使用或者保持第二网络设备的早期数据转移的信息，源网络设备向第二网络设备发送的指示信息#3用于指示保持第二网络设备中终端设备的上下文。又一示例，源网络设备向第二网络设备发送的指示信息#3，和源网络设备接收的来自目标网络设备的指示信息#3相同。例如，源网络设备接收的来自目标网络设备的指示信息#3用于指示使用或者保持第二网络设备的早期数据转移的信息，源网络设备向第二网络设备发送的指示信息#3也用于指示使用或者保持第二网络设备的早期数据转移的信息。
以上仅是简单的说明，关于适用于方法800的具体流程，下文结合图12-14所示的实施例说明。
通过本申请实施例，切换后确定为终端设备配置的网络设备包括切换之前为终端设备配置的网络设备的情况下，可以利用之前早期数据转移中转移的数据，从而避免在早期数据转移中对这些数据包再进行一次转移，可以减少这些数据包的传输时延。
可选地，方法800还可以包括步骤830。
830，源网络设备确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括第二网络设备。
一可能的方式，目标网络设备向源网络设备发送第二网络设备的标识信息，源网络设备根据第二网络设备的标识信息，确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括第二网络设备，或者说确定需要保持或者保留早期数据转移的数据包的网络设备。通过使用标识的方式，简单且准确。此外，当涉及到多个第二网络设备的情况下，即切换后的N个第一网络设备中包括多个切换前的候选网络设备(即多个第二网络设备)，通过指示标识的方式，使用的资源较少。
例如，源网络设备向目标网络设备发送切换请求消息，目标网络设备向源网络设备发送切换请求响应消息，并且该切换请求响应消息中携带第二网络设备的标识信息。又如，该第二网络设备的标识信息和指示信息#3可以携带于同一信令中。
下面示例地介绍第二网络设备的标识信息和指示信息#3携带于同一信令的方案。
例如，当切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括一个第二网络设备的情况下，源网络设备接收目标网络设备发送的一个信令，该信令包括指示信息#3和第二网络设备的标识，该指示信息#3用于指示使用第二网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。源网络设备根据该 信令，确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括第二网络设备。进一步地，该信令中还可以包括指示目标网络设备为终端设备配置的第二网络设备是作为候选网络设备还是辅网络设备的指示信息。
又如，当切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括多个第二网络设备的情况下，源网络设备接收目标网络设备发送的一个信令，该信令包括指示信息#3和多个第二网络设备的标识，该指示信息#3用于指示使用该多个第二网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。根据该信令中包括的多个第二网络设备的标识，源网络设备确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括该多个第二网络设备。进一步地，该信令中还可以包括指示目标网络设备为终端设备配置的第二网络设备是作为候选网络设备还是辅网络设备的指示信息。
又如，当切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括多个第二网络设备的情况下，源网络设备接收目标网络设备发送的多个信令，每个信令包括一个指示信息#3和一个第二网络设备的标识，该指示信息#3用于指示使用该第二网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。根据该多个信令中包括的多个第二网络设备的标识，源网络设备确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括该多个第二网络设备。进一步地，每个信令中还可以包括指示目标网络设备为终端设备配置的第二网络设备是作为候选网络设备还是辅网络设备的指示信息。
应理解，上述仅是示例性说明，对次不作限定。任何可以使得源网络设备确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备是否包括切换前的网络设备的方案都适用于本申请实施例。例如，目标网络设备可以向源网络设备发送N个第一网络设备的标识信息，源网络设备根据该N个第一网络设备的标识信息，判断切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备是否包括切换前的网络设备。
可选地，目标网络设备可以接收该第二网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。作为示例，如图8所示，方法800还可以包括步骤840。
840，目标网络设备可以从源网络设备接收早期数据转移的信息。
从而，目标网络设备可以根据该早期数据转移的信息，如第二网络设备中之前进行的早期数据转移转移的数据包，和/或，第二网络设备可以丢弃或忽略的数据包的信息，确定后续向第二网络设备转移哪些待向终端设备发送的数据包。
此外，目标网络设备还可以通知第二网络设备可以丢弃哪些早期数据转移的数据包，如目标网络设备还可以向第二网络设备发送指示信息#1。
可选地，目标网络设备还可以获知切换前为终端设备配置的网络设备的信息。以第二网络设备为例，该切换前为终端设备配置的第二网络设备的信息，例如可以包括：第二网络设备的标识信息，和/或，终端设备在第二网络设备的标识信息。该切换前为终端设备配置的网络设备的信息，例如可以携带于切换请求消息中，即源网络设备向目标网络设备发送切换请求消息，该切换请求消息中可以包括该切换前为终端设备配置的网络设备的信息。
此外，目标网络设备还可以根据该切换前为终端设备配置的网络设备的标识信息，判断配置的N个第一网络设备是否包括切换前为终端设备配置的网络设备。例如，目标网络设备根据网络设备的标识，能知道切换前后的网络设备是否相同。
此外，目标网络设备获知切换前为终端设备配置的网络设备的信息后，可以基于该信息来决定选择哪些网络设备来为终端设备提供服务，或者目标网络设备也可以基于该信息 来决定选择哪些候选网络设备，这样也可以尽量复用之前的早传数据，降低传输时延，提高用户体验。
可选地，目标网络设备还可以向第二网络设备发送终端设备在第二网络设备的标识信息。
上文结合图7和图8分别介绍了根据本申请实施例提出的数据传输的方法。应理解，方法700和方法800可以单独使用，也可以结合使用，对此不作限定。例如，以方法700和方法800结合使用为例，在切换之前可以使用方法700所示的方案进行早期数据转移，在确定要切换网络设备时可以按照方法800所示的方案进行切换。
为便于理解，结合不同流程进行示例性说明。
首先，结合图9至图11介绍适用于方法700所示的实施例的可能的流程。
图9是适用于本申请实施例的基于条件的PSCell增加(conditional PSCell addition，CPA)流程的示意图。如图9所示，方法900主要以终端设备、MN、候选SN1、以及候选SN2之间的交互为例进行示例性说明。图9所示的方法900可以包括如下步骤。
910，MN与候选SN之间进行条件PSCell增加过程。
如图9所示，MN与候选SN1以及候选SN2之间进行条件PSCell增加过程(即CPA过程)。
例如，MN向各个候选SN发送SN增加请求消息。示例地，该SN增加请求消息中可以携带指示信息，用于指示本次SN增加请求消息是为了条件SN增加。或者，示例地，不管是条件SN增加还是条件SN改变，该SN增加请求消息均用于指示本次SN增加请求消息是为了条件SN增加。
候选SN可以向MN发送SN增加请求消息的响应消息，如候选SN可以向MN反馈SN增加请求确认消息。示例地，该SN增加请求确认消息中可以携带指示信息，用于指示本次SN增加请求确认消息是对条件SN增加的响应。示例地，该SN增加请求确认消息中还可以携带候选SN为终端设备配置的对应候选PSCell的无线配置信息。
上述仅是示例性说明，对于步骤910本申请实施例不作限定。例如，步骤910可以参考现有技术或以后出现的方式。
应理解，在本申请实施例中，一次条件SN增加过程可以对应一个候选PSCell，即一次SN增加请求消息和SN增加请求确认消息针对一个候选PSCell。或者，一次条件SN增加过程也可以对应多个候选PSCell，即一次SN增加请求消息和SN增加请求确认消息针对多个候选PSCell。
920，MN向终端设备发送CPA配置信息。
例如，MN向终端设备发送RRC重配消息，RRC重配消息中包括CPA配置信息。
CPA配置信息，例如可以包括以下中的一项或多项：MN为每个候选PSCell配置的触发条件、候选SN为终端设备配置的对应候选PSCell的无线配置信息、当终端设备接入每个候选PSCell时，MN为终端设备配置的对应每个候选PSCell的MCG的无线配置信息。触发条件，即用于表示候选PSCell小区满足一定的条件时，终端设备可以接入该候选PSCell小区。触发条件例如可以是候选PSCell的信号质量满足一定的条件，如候选PSCell的信号质量好于一定门限，或者候选PSCell的信号质量比PCell的信号质量好于一定门限，或者PCell的信号质量低于一定门限且候选PSCell的信号质量好于一定门限，等等。
此外，当终端设备选择某个满足条件的候选PSCell作为最终的PSCell时，终端设备可以采用该候选PSCell对应的无线配置信息。如果CPA配置中包括MN为终端设备配置的对应每个候选PSCell的MCG的无线配置信息，则终端设备同时采用该候选PSCell对应的MCG的无线配置信息。
上述仅是示例性说明，对于步骤920本申请实施例不作限定。例如，步骤920可以参考现有技术或以后出现的方式。
930，终端设备判断候选PSCell是否满足CPA中候选PSCell对应的触发条件。
例如，终端设备从MN收到CPA配置信息，终端设备根据其中的候选PSCell及对应的触发条件，判断对应PSCell的触发条件是否满足。
上述仅是示例性说明，对于步骤930本申请实施例不作限定。例如，步骤930可以参考现有技术或以后出现的方式。
940，MN向候选SN发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略早期数据转移的部分或全部数据包。
如图9所示，MN向候选SN1发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略早期数据转移的部分或全部数据包。
也就是说，在步骤940中，MN向候选SN发送指示信息#1，该指示信息#1用于指示丢弃或忽略MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
在本申请实施例中，为区分，用指示信息#1表示用于指示丢弃或忽略早期数据转移的部分或全部数据包的信息。
一示例，在步骤940之前，MN可以向候选SN(如候选SN1)进行MN终止的SCG bearer的早期数据转移(early data forwarding)。在步骤940中，MN向候选SN(如候选SN1)发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略MN终止的SCG bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
又一示例，在步骤940之前，MN可以向候选SN(如候选SN1)进行MN终止的split bearer的早期数据转移。在步骤940中，MN向候选SN(如候选SN1)发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略MN终止的split bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
如上文所述，关于MN终止的SCG bearer或MN终止的split bearer，早期数据转移也可以称为早期数据传输，或者也可以为其他名称，其命名不对本申请实施例保护范围造成限定。本申请主要以早期数据转移为例进行说明。
MN向候选SN进行MN终止的SCG bearer或MN终止的split bearer的早期数据转移，对于这些承载(即MN终止的SCG bearer或MN终止的split bearer)而言，一可能的实现方式，MN进行的早期数据转移可以是以PDCP PDU的形式把数据包发送给SN。
一可能的实现方式，MN通过MN与候选SN的用户面接口，向候选SN发送这些PDCP PDU。例如，MN通过通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service，GPRS)用户面隧道协议(GPRS tunnelling protocol user plane，GTP-U)协议向候选SN发送这些数据包。
此外，在早期数据转移中，还可以携带数据包对应的序列号(sequence number，SN)。例如，可以在GTP-U的扩展头中携带该数据包对应的新空口用户面(new radio user plane，NR-U)序列号。一般地，MN会为每一个转移的数据包分配连续的NR-U序列号，通过 携带数据包对应的NR-U序列号，可以获知哪些数据包进行了早期数据转移。
在进行了早期数据转移之后，MN可以基于当前向终端设备发送数据的情况，向候选SN发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略对于MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
其中，关于指示信息#1的发送时机不作限定。示例地，可以在满足预设条件的情况下，发送指示信息#1。预设条件，可以是关于时间上的限定(如周期性发送)，或者也可以是关于数据量的限定(如数据量与门限值或门限范围的比较)，或者也可以是其他方面的限定。
例如，一可能的情况，MN可以周期性发送指示信息#1。又如，又一可能的情况，当MN向终端设备发送的下行数据量达到一定门限时，MN给候选SN发送指示信息#1。又如，又一可能的情况，当MN向终端设备发送的下行数据量被终端设备正确接收之后，MN给候选SN发送指示信息#1。
此外，关于指示信息#1的形式也不作限定。一可能的形式，指示信息#1可以为一个或多个序列号的形式。
一可能的方式，该指示信息#1可以为一个序列号，如记为序列号#A。例如，通过该序列号#A，可以指示候选SN需要丢弃那些之前转移的数据包(如PDCP PDU)中对应的序列号比序列号#A更低的那些数据包(甚至可以丢弃该序列号#A对应的数据包)。也就是说，如果MN要指示丢弃或忽略比序列号#A更低的序列号对应的数据包(甚至指示可以丢弃该序列号#A对应的数据包)，那么，MN可以向候选SN指示序列号#A。如果候选SN还没有把比序列号#A更低的序列号对应的数据(甚至以及该序列号#A对应的数据包)包发送给终端设备，则候选SN就不会把这些数据包(即比序列号#A更低的序列号对应的数据包，甚至以及该序列号#A对应的数据包)发送给终端设备。作为示例而非限定，候选SN可以把这些数据包(即比序列号#A更低的序列号对应的数据包，甚至以及该序列号#A对应的数据包)丢弃，或者也可以直接忽略这些数据包。
又一可能的方式，该指示信息#1可以为多个序列号，如序列号列表的形式。例如，通过该序列号列表，可以指示候选SN需要丢弃那些之前转移的数据包(如PDCP PDU)中序列号列表中序列号所对应的那些数据包。也就是说，MN可以指示丢弃或忽略的数据包所对应的序列号。如果候选SN还没有把序列号列表中的序列号对应的数据包发送给终端设备，则候选SN就不会把这些数据包(即序列号列表中的序列号对应的数据包)发送给终端设备。作为示例而非限定，候选SN可以把这些数据包(即序列号列表中的序列号对应的数据包)丢弃，或者也可以直接忽略这些数据包。
又一可能的方式，该指示信息#1可以为多个数据包对应的块以及每个数据包对应块的起始序列号及该块中数据包的数目。其中，每个块对应的数据包为以该起始序列号为开始的多个连续序列号对应的数据包。例如，携带下行丢弃的块的数目(DL discard number of blocks)、每块对应的数据包(如NR PDCP PDU)的起始SN(DL discard NR PDCP PDU SN start)，以及每块对应的大小(discarded block size)。通过这些信息，可以指示候选SN需要丢弃那些之前转移的数据包(如PDCP PDU)中序列号对应这些块中的序列号的那些数据包。也就是说，MN可以指示丢弃或忽略的数据包所对应的序列号。如果候选SN还没有把这些序列号对应的数据包发送给终端设备，则候选SN就不会把这些数据包(即 这些序列号对应的数据包)发送给终端设备。作为示例而非限定，候选SN可以把这些数据包(即这些序列号对应的数据包)丢弃，或者也可以直接忽略这些数据包。
应理解，上述两种方式仅是示例性说明，对此不作限定。例如，MN也可以向候选SN指示保留的数据包对应的序列号，候选SN可以丢弃或忽略这些数据包(即MN指示保留的数据包对应的序列号)以外的数据包。
还应理解，在未来协议中，用于表示与指示信息#1相同功能的命名都适用于本申请实施例。例如，指示信息#1也可以属于早期数据转移的信息。
可选地，MN还可以向候选SN指示指示信息#1对应的DRB。例如，MN给候选SN的信息中可以携带MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer的DRB列表，该DRB列表中可以包括每个DRB的DRB ID，还可以包括指示信息#1指示候选SN可以丢弃的下行转移数据包的信息。
应理解，以上信息(如指示信息#1，和/或，指示信息#1对应的DRB等)可以通过MN与候选SN之间的用户面发送(如在GTP-U协议中携带)，也可以通过MN与候选SN之间的控制面发送(如MN向候选SN发送一个消息，比如MN在早期状态转移(early status transfer)消息中携带以上信息)。
可选地，如果是通过MN与候选SN之间的用户面发送，由于用户面建立的GTP-U协议隧道是针对每个承载的，故所有指示信息#1中可以无需携带DRB ID。
可选地，MN还可以向候选SN发送指示信息#2，指示MN可以或支持进行MN终止的SCG beare、split bearer的早期数据转移。例如，在MN向候选SN进行早期数据转移之前，MN向候选SN发送指示信息，指示MN可以或支持进行MN终止的SCG beare或split bearer中的一项或多项的早期数据转移。示例地，该指示信息#2可以通过MN与候选SN的控制面接口发送，也可以通过MN与候选SN之间的用户面接口发送，对此不作限定。
应理解，在图9所示的示例中，MN终止的SCG bearer，指的是网络侧为终端设备配置的CPA中的MN终止的SCG bearer。在图9所示的示例中，MN终止的split bearer，指的是网络侧为终端设备配置的CPA中的MN终止的split bearer。
还应理解，MN可以向候选SN发送多次指示信息#1。例如，MN可以周期性地向候选SN发送指示信息#1。这样，候选SN可以根据接收到的多个指示信息#1，确定丢弃或忽略各个指示信息#1指示丢弃或忽略的数据包。或者，候选SN也可以根据最近一次接收到的指示信息#1，确定丢弃或忽略哪些数据包。如指示信息#1为一个序列号，如上述序列号#A，候选SN可以根据最近一次接收到的指示信息#1，确定丢弃或忽略比序列号#A更低的序列号对应的数据包。
还应理解，在图9所示的示例中，主要以MN与候选SN1之间交互为例进行了示例性说明，对此不作限定。例如，MN与候选SN2之间也可以进行早期数据转移，MN也可以向候选SN2发送一次或多次指示信息#1。又如，在MN确定终端设备将要接入满足条件的候选SN后，MN可以与该满足条件的候选SN进行早期数据转移，且还可以向该满足条件的候选SN发送指示信息#1。
950，终端设备接入满足条件的候选SN。
当终端设备判断出候选PSCell的触发条件满足时，终端设备接入候选PSCell。例如终端设备与候选PSCell进行随机接入过程。如图9所示，假设候选SN1中的候选PSCell 的触发条件满足，那么终端设备接入候选SN1。
上述仅是示例性说明，对于步骤950本申请实施例不作限定。例如，步骤950可以参考现有技术或以后出现的方式。
960，候选SN向终端设备发送下行数据。
当终端设备接入到候选SN之后，候选SN可以向终端设备发送下行数据。例如，候选SN可以根据早期数据转移的情况，向终端设备发送下行数据。又如，候选SN可以根据早期数据转移的情况以及指示信息#1，向终端设备发送下行数据。
下面以MN终止的SCG bearer或MN终止的split bearer为例，介绍以下几种可能的情况。
一可能的情况，当终端设备接入到候选SN之后，对于MN终止的SCG bearer或MN终止的split bearer，候选SN可以根据MN早期数据转移的数据向终端设备发送下行数据。
或者，又一可能的情况，当终端设备接入到候选SN之后，对于MN终止的SCG bearer或MN终止的split bearer，候选SN还可以根据MN早期数据转移的数据及指示信息#1(如最近一次收到的指示信息#1)，向终端设备发送下行数据。例如，候选SN不会把指示信息#1(如最近一次收到的指示信息#1)中指示需要丢弃的数据包(如PDCP PDU)发送给终端设备，候选SN可以把这些需要丢弃的数据包丢弃，或者直接忽略这些需要丢弃的数据包。
或者，又一可能的情况，当MN获知终端设备接入到候选SN之后(例如MN从终端设备收到指示终端设备已经满足候选PSCell的触发条件；或成功接入候选SN之后，候选SN向MN发送终端设备接入的指示)，MN向候选SN发送指示信息#1，候选SN根据MN早期数据转移的数据及该指示信息#1向终端设备发送下行数据。例如，当MN获知终端设备接入到候选SN之后，对于MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer，MN可以向该候选SN发送一个指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略对于MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包(同步骤940中的内容)。
上文结合图9所示的步骤910-960示例地介绍了CPA流程，应理解，上述各个步骤仅是示例性说明，对此不作严格限定。此外，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
图10是适用于本申请实施例的MN触发的基于条件的PSCell改变(conditional PSCell change，CPC)流程的一示意图。
如图10所示，方法1000主要以终端设备、MN、候选SN1、候选SN2、以及源SN之间的交互为例进行示例性说明。为区分，用源SN表示当前为终端设备已经配置的SN。应理解，源SN是为区分作的命名，例如源SN也可以记为当前SN，其具体命名方式不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。图10所示的方法1000可以包括如下步骤。
1010，MN与候选SN之间进行CPC过程。
也就是说，MN与候选SN之间进行条件PSCell改变过程。如图10所示，MN与候选SN1以及候选SN2之间进行条件PSCell改变过程(即CPC过程)。
例如，MN向各个候选SN发送SN增加请求消息。示例地，该SN增加请求消息中可以携带指示信息，用于指示本次SN增加请求消息是为了条件SN改变。或者，示例地， 不管是条件SN增加还是条件SN改变，该SN增加请求消息均用于指示本次SN增加请求消息是为了条件SN改变。
候选SN可以向MN发送SN增加请求消息的响应消息，如候选SN可以向MN反馈SN增加请求确认消息。示例地，该SN增加请求确认消息中可以携带指示信息，用于指示本次SN增加请求确认消息是对条件SN改变的响应。示例地，该SN增加请求确认消息中还可以携带候选SN为终端设备配置的对应候选PSCell的无线配置信息。示例地，候选SN为终端设备配置的对应候选PSCell的无线配置信息是以候选SN为终端设备配置的RRC重配消息的形式在SN增加请求确认消息中携带。
上述仅是示例性说明，对于步骤1010本申请实施例不作限定。例如，步骤1010可以参考现有技术或以后出现的方式。
示例地，方法1000还可以包括步骤1001。
1001，MN可以向源SN指示，源SN可以对SN终止的bearer进行早期数据转移。
也就是说，在步骤1010之后，MN可以向源SN发送一个指示信息，指示源SN可以对SN终止的bearer进行早期数据转移(这里的SN终止的bearer是在CPC之前的bearer，即在CPC之前，这些bearer就是SN终止的bearer)，从而可以将源SN中待向终端设备发送的数据包进行转移。或者MN可以向源SN发送一个指示信息，指示MN触发了CPC，这样源SN就可以确定是否进行对SN终止的bearer进行早期数据转移，即由源SN决定是否进行对SN终止的bearer进行早期数据转移。
应理解，步骤1001仅是示例，对此不作限定。例如，源SN可以向MN发送一个指示信息，指示可以对SN终止的bearer进行早期数据转移。
在步骤1001之前，方法1000还可以包括步骤1020。
1020，MN向终端设备发送CPC配置信息。
例如，MN向终端设备发送RRC重配消息，RRC重配消息中包括CPC配置信息。
CPC配置信息，例如可以包括以下中的一项或多项：MN为每个候选PSCell配置的触发条件、候选SN为终端设备配置的对应候选PSCell的无线配置信息、当终端设备接入每个候选PSCell时，MN为终端设备配置的对应每个候选PSCell的MCG的无线配置信息。关于触发条件，可以参考上文步骤920中的描述，此次不再赘述。
当终端设备选择某个满足条件的候选PSCell作为最终的PSCell时，终端设备可以采用该候选PSCell对应的无线配置信息。如果CPC配置中包括MN为MN为终端设备配置的对应每个候选PSCell的MCG的无线配置信息，则终端设备同时采用该候选PSCell对应的MCG的无线配置信息。
上述仅是示例性说明，对于步骤1020本申请实施例不作限定。例如，步骤1020可以参考现有技术或以后出现的方式。
1030，终端设备判断候选小区是否满足条件。
也就是说，终端设备判断候选PSCell是否满足条件PSCell改变对应的触发条件。
例如，终端设备从MN收到CPC配置信息，终端设备根据其中的候选PSCell及对应的触发条件，判断对应PSCell的触发条件是否满足。
上述仅是示例性说明，对于步骤1030本申请实施例不作限定。例如，步骤1030可以参考现有技术或以后出现的方式。
1040，MN向候选SN发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略早期数据转移的部分或全部数据包。
如图10所示，MN向候选SN1发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略早期数据转移的部分或全部数据包。
也就是说，在步骤1040中，MN向候选SN发送指示信息#1，该指示信息#1用于指示丢弃或忽略MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
一示例，在步骤1040之前，MN可以向候选SN(如候选SN1)进行MN终止的SCG bearer的早期数据转移。在步骤1040中，MN向候选SN(如候选SN1)发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略MN终止的SCG bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
又一示例，在步骤1040之前，MN可以向候选SN(如候选SN1)进行MN终止的split bearer的早期数据转移。在步骤1040中，MN向候选SN(如候选SN1)发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略MN终止的split bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
可选地，对于CPC之前为SN终止的bearer，在CPC过程中，这些承载变为MN终止的split bearer或者MN终止的SCG bearer，源SN可以按照步骤1001，把数据包进行早期数据转移给MN。之后MN可以按照步骤1040中的描述，进行早期数据转移及指示丢弃或忽略MN终止的split bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包。在这种情况下，MN可以根据源SN给MN发送的指示丢弃或忽略SN终止的bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包。例如，源SN会给MN发送一些指示信息，指示丢弃或忽略SN终止的bearer中的那些早期数据转移的数据包，具体指示信息类似指示信息#1，源SN与MN之间进行的早期数据转移的数据包的形式可以为PDCP SDU。MN可以根据源SN的指示来生成给候选SN的指示信息#1。
可选地，对于CPC之前为MN终止的bearer，在CPC过程中，这些MN终止的bearer变为MN终止的split bearer或者MN终止的SCG bearer，则MN可以自己生成指示信息#1。
步骤1040同前面CPA流程中的步骤940，此处不再赘述。
应理解，在图10所示的示例中，MN终止的SCG bearer，指的是网络侧为终端设备配置的CPC中的MN终止的SCG bearer。在图10所示的示例中，MN终止的split bearer，指的是网络侧为终端设备配置的CPC中的MN终止的split bearer。这些bearer在MN触发的CPC之前可能是SN终止的MCG/SCG/Split bearer，也可能是MN终止的MCG/SCG/Split bearer。
1050，终端设备接入满足条件的候选SN。
当终端设备判断出候选PSCell的触发条件满足时，终端设备接入候选PSCell。例如终端设备与候选PSCell进行随机接入过程。如图10所示，假设候选SN1中的候选PSCell的触发条件满足，那么终端设备接入候选SN1。
步骤1050同前面CPA流程中的步骤950，此处不再赘述。
1060，候选SN向终端设备发送下行数据。
当终端设备接入到候选SN之后，候选SN可以向终端设备发送下行数据。例如，候选SN可以根据早期数据转移的情况，向终端设备发送下行数据。又如，候选SN可以根 据早期数据转移的情况以及指示信息#1，向终端设备发送下行数据。
步骤1060同前面CPA流程中的步骤960，此处不再赘述。
上文结合图10所示的步骤1010-1060示例地介绍了MN触发的CPC流程，应理解，上述各个步骤仅是示例性说明，对此不作严格限定。此外，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
图11是适用于本申请实施例的SN触发CPC流程的一示意图。
如图11所示，方法1100主要以终端设备、MN、候选SN1、候选SN2、以及源SN之间的交互为例进行示例性说明。为区分，用源SN表示当前为终端设备已经配置的SN。应理解，源SN是为区分作的命名，例如源SN也可以记为当前SN，其具体命名方式不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。图11所示的方法1100可以包括如下步骤。
1110，源SN与候选SN之间进行CPC过程。
也就是说，源SN与候选SN之间进行条件PSCell改变过程。如图11所示，MN与候选SN1、候选SN2以及源SN之间进行条件PSCell改变过程(即CPC过程)。
例如，源SN向MN发送SN改变需要消息。示例地，该SN改变需要消息中可以携带指示信息，用于指示本次SN改变需要消息是为了条件SN改变。该SN改变需要消息中可以携带候选SN的标识。
MN向候选SN发送SN增加请求消息。示例地，该SN增加请求消息中可以携带指示信息，用于指示本次SN增加请求消息是为了条件SN改变。或者，示例地，不管是条件SN增加还是条件SN改变，该SN增加请求消息均用于指示本次SN增加请求消息是为了条件SN改变。
候选SN可以向MN发送SN增加请求消息的响应消息，如候选SN可以向MN反馈SN增加请求确认消息。示例地，该SN增加请求确认消息中可以携带指示信息，用于指示本次SN增加请求确认消息是对条件SN改变的响应。示例地，该SN增加请求确认消息中还可以携带候选SN为终端设备配置的对应候选PSCell的无线配置信息。示例地，候选SN为终端设备配置的对应候选PSCell的无线配置信息可以是以候选SN为终端设备配置的RRC重配消息的形式在SN增加请求确认消息中携带。
上述仅是示例性说明，对于步骤1110本申请实施例不作限定。例如，步骤1110可以参考现有技术或以后出现的方式。
示例地，方法1100还可以包括步骤1101。
1101，MN可以向源SN指示，源SN可以对SN终止的bearer进行早期数据转移。
也就是说，在步骤1010之后，MN可以向源SN发送一个指示信息，指示源SN可以对SN终止的bearer进行早期数据转移(这里的SN终止的bearer是在CPC之前的bearer，即在CPC之前，这些bearer就是SN终止的bearer)，从而可以将源SN中待向终端设备发送的数据包进行转移。或者MN可以向源SN发送一个指示信息，指示MN触发了CPC，这样源SN就可以确定是否进行对SN终止的bearer进行早期数据转移，即由源SN决定是否进行对SN终止的bearer进行早期数据转移。
应理解，步骤1101仅是示例，对此不作限定。例如，源SN可以向MN发送一个指示信息，指示可以对SN终止的bearer进行早期数据转移。
在步骤1101之前，方法1100还可以包括步骤1120。
1120，MN向终端设备发送CPC配置信息。
步骤1120同前面MN触发的CPC中的步骤1020，此处不再赘述。
1130，终端设备判断候选小区是否满足条件。
也就是说，终端设备判断候选PSCell是否满足条件PSCell改变对应的触发条件。
步骤1130同前面MN触发的CPC中的步骤1030，此处不再赘述。
1140，MN向候选SN发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略早期数据转移的部分或全部数据包。
也就是说，在步骤1140中，MN向候选SN发送指示信息#1，该指示信息#1用于指示丢弃或忽略MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
一示例，在步骤1140之前，MN可以向候选SN(如候选SN1)进行MN终止的SCG bearer的早期数据转移。在步骤1140中，MN向候选SN(如候选SN1)发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略MN终止的SCG bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
又一示例，在步骤1140之前，MN可以向候选SN(如候选SN1)进行MN终止的split bearer的早期数据转移。在步骤1140中，MN向候选SN(如候选SN1)发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略MN终止的split bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
可选地，对于CPC之前为SN终止的bearer，在CPC过程中，这些承载变为MN终止的split bearer或者MN终止的SCG bearer，源SN会按照步骤1101，把数据包进行早期数据转移给MN。之后MN可以按照步骤1140中的描述，进行早期数据转移及指示丢弃或忽略MN终止的split bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包。在这种情况下，MN可以根据源SN给MN发送的指示丢弃或忽略SN终止的bearer中的哪些早期数据转移的数据包。例如，源SN会给MN发送一些指示信息，指示丢弃或忽略SN终止的bearer中的那些早期数据转移的数据包，具体指示信息类似指示信息#1，源SN与MN之间进行的早期数据转移的数据包的形式可以是PDCP SDU。MN可以根据源SN的指示来生成给候选SN的指示信息#1。
可选地，对于CPC之前为MN终止的bearer，在CPC过程中，这些MN终止的bearer变为MN终止的split bearer或者MN终止的SCG bearer，则MN可以自己生成指示信息#1。
步骤1140同前面MN触发的CPC中的步骤1040，此处不再赘述。
1150，终端设备接入满足条件的候选SN。
当终端设备判断出候选PSCell的触发条件满足时，终端设备接入候选PSCell。例如终端设备与候选PSCell进行随机接入过程。如图11所示，假设候选SN1中的候选PSCell的触发条件满足，那么终端设备接入候选SN1。
步骤1150同前面MN触发的CPC中的步骤1050，此处不再赘述。
1160，候选SN向终端设备发送下行数据。
步骤1160同前面MN触发的CPC中的步骤1060，此处不再赘述。
上文结合图11所示的步骤1110-1160示例地介绍了SN触发的CPC流程，应理解，上述各个步骤仅是示例性说明，对此不作严格限定。此外，上述各过程的序号的大小并不 意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
上文结合图9至图11，出了适用于适用于方法700所示的实施例的可能的流程。基于上述方案，对于MN终止的SCG bearer和/或MN终止的split bearer，MN可以向SN进行早期数据转移。此外，MN还可以向SN发送指示信息#1，指示丢弃或忽略哪些早期数据转移的数据包。从而，当终端设备接入到候选PSCell之后，候选PSCell可以给终端设备发送这些承载的下行数据，从而减少了这些承载中下行数据的传输时延。
下面，结合图12至图14介绍适用于方法800所示的实施例的可能的流程。
图12是适用于本申请实施例的切换前配置了CPAC，之后发生了MN切换的场景的示意性流程图。
如图12所示，方法1200主要以终端设备、源MN、候选SN1、候选SN2、以及目标MN之间的交互为例进行示例性说明。为区分，用源MN表示切换前的MN，用目标MN表示切换后的MN。应理解，源MN和目标MN是为区分作的命名，其具体命名方式不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。图12所示的方法1200可以包括如下步骤。
1210，网络侧为终端设备配置CPAC。
对于步骤1210本申请实施例不作限定，例如，可以参考上述步骤910和920的描述，也可以参考步骤1010和1020的描述，也可以参考步骤1110和1120的描述。步骤1210可以参考现有技术或以后出现的方式，此处不再介绍。
1220，源MN向目标MN发送切换请求消息。
源MN决定切换终端设备到目标MN，源MN向目标MN发送切换请求消息。切换请求消息中可以包括以下中的一项或多项：候选SN的标识，以及终端设备在候选SN的标识。其中，终端设备在候选SN的标识，例如可以为MN与候选SN之间为该终端设备建立的控制面接口中，候选SN为终端设备分配的标识，例如XnAP ID或X2AP ID。可选地，以上信息(即选SN的标识，以及终端设备在候选SN的标识)可以称为终端设备在候选SN的上下文参考信息。需要说明的是，这些信息是针对每个候选SN的，即切换请求消息中携带终端设备在每个候选SN的以上信息。
应理解，上述以终端设备在候选SN的上下文参考信息承载于切换请求消息中为例进行示例性说明，对此不作限定。例如，终端设备在候选SN的上下文参考信息也可以单独发送给目标MN。
1230，目标MN向SN发送SN增加请求消息。
如图12所示，目标MN可以向候选SN1、候选SN2发送SN增加请求消息。
下面结合几种场景进行说明。
场景1，切换前为CPA，切换之后为CPA的场景。
目标MN决定为终端设备配置CPA。
如果目标MN决定配置的候选SN和切换之前的候选SN相同，即目标MN决定保持某个或某些候选SN，目标MN向该候选SN发送SN建立请求消息，该消息中携带切换之前终端设备在候选SN的标识。
示例地，目标MN可以根据源MN发送的候选SN的标识(如源MN发送的切换请求消息中携带的候选SN的标识)能知道切换前后的候选SN是否相同。
应理解，对于多个候选SN的情况，目标MN可以分别进行判断。
场景2，切换前为CPA，切换之后为DC的场景。
目标MN决定为终端设备配置DC，即为终端设备配置一个SN(此时不称为候选SN，如可以称为SN或者也可以称为目标SN)。
如果目标MN决定配置的SN和切换之前的候选SN相同，即目标MN决定把某个候选SN作为配置的SN，目标MN向该SN发送SN建立请求消息，该消息中携带切换之前终端设备在候选SN的标识。
示例地，目标MN可以根据源MN发送的候选SN的标识(如源MN发送的切换请求消息中携带的候选SN的标识)能知道切换前后的SN是否相同。
应理解，对于配置多个SN的情况，目标MN可以分别进行判断。
场景3，切换前为CPC，切换之后为CPC的场景。
(1)对于切换前为MN触发的CPC，切换之后为MN触发的CPC的场景。
目标MN决定为终端设备配置MN触发的CPC。
如果目标MN决定配置的候选SN和切换之前的候选SN相同，即目标MN决定保持某个或某些候选SN，目标MN向该候选SN发送SN建立请求消息，该消息中携带切换之前终端设备在候选SN的标识。
示例地，目标MN可以根据源MN发送的候选SN的标识(如源MN发送的切换请求消息中携带的候选SN的标识)能知道切换前后的候选SN是否相同。
应理解，对于多个候选SN的情况，目标MN可以分别进行判断。
(2)对于切换前为SN触发的CPC，切换之后为SN触发的CPC的场景。
目标MN向切换后的目标SN(即切换之后触发CPC的SN)发送SN建立请求消息，该SN建立请求消息中可以携带切换之前的候选SN的标识，此外，该SN建立请求消息中还可能携带终端设备在各候选SN(一个或多个候选SN)的标识。SN触发CPC，如果目标SN确定的候选SN和切换之前的候选SN相同，那么可能有以下两种情况。
一可能情况，如果目标SN从目标MN获取到了终端设备在各候选SN(一个或多个候选SN)的标识，以各候选SN中的一个候选SN为例，目标SN向候选SN发送终端设备在该候选SN的标识。例如，目标SN直接向候选SN发送终端设备在该候选SN的标识；或者也可以由目标MN向候选SN发送终端设备在该候选SN的标识(如目标SN先向目标MN发送，目标MN再向候选SN发送)。
又一可能的情况，如果目标SN没有从目标MN获取到终端设备在各候选SN(一个或多个候选SN)的标识，以各候选SN中的一个候选SN为例，目标SN向目标MN发送候选SN的标识，目标MN根据该候选SN的标识获得切换之前终端设备在候选SN的标识，目标MN再把终端设备在候选SN的标识发送给该候选SN。
应理解，对于多个候选SN的情况，目标MN可以分别进行判断。
(3)对于切换前为SN触发的CPC，切换之后为MN触发的CPC的场景。
目标MN决定为终端设备配置MN触发的CPC。
如果目标MN决定配置的候选SN和切换之前的候选SN相同，即目标MN决定保持某个或某些候选SN，目标MN向候选SN发送SN建立请求消息，该消息中携带切换之前终端设备在候选SN的标识。
示例地，目标MN可以根据源MN发送的候选SN的标识(如源MN发送的切换请求消息中携带的候选SN的标识)能知道切换前后的候选SN是否相同。
应理解，对于多个候选SN的情况，目标MN可以分别进行判断。
(4)对于切换前为MN触发的CPC，切换之后为SN触发的CPC的场景。
目标MN向切换后的目标SN(即切换之后触发CPC的SN)发送SN建立请求消息，该SN建立请求消息中可以携带切换之前的候选SN的标识，此外，该SN建立请求消息中还可能携带终端设备在各候选SN(一个或多个候选SN)的标识。SN触发CPC，如果目标SN确定的候选SN和切换之前的候选SN相同，那么可能有以下两种情况。
一可能情况，如果目标SN从目标MN获取到了终端设备在各候选SN(一个或多个候选SN)的标识，以各候选SN中的一个候选SN为例，目标SN向候选SN发送终端设备在该候选SN的标识。例如，目标SN直接向候选SN发送终端设备在该候选SN的标识；或者也可以由目标MN向候选SN发送终端设备在该候选SN的标识(如目标SN先向目标MN发送，目标MN再向候选SN发送)。
又一可能的情况，如果目标SN没有从目标MN获取到终端设备在各候选SN(一个或多个候选SN)的标识，以各候选SN中的一个候选SN为例，目标SN向目标MN发送候选SN的标识，目标MN根据该候选SN的标识获得切换之前终端设备在候选SN的标识，目标MN再把终端设备在候选SN的标识发送给该候选SN。
应理解，上述以一个候选SN为例进行了示例性说明，对于多个候选SN的情况，目标MN可以分别进行判断。
场景4，切换前为CPC，切换之后为CPA的场景。
目标MN决定为终端设备配置CPA。
如果目标MN决定配置的候选SN和切换之前的候选SN相同，即目标MN决定保持某个或某些候选SN，目标MN向候选SN发送SN建立请求消息，该消息中携带切换之前终端设备在候选SN的标识。
示例地，目标MN可以根据源MN发送的候选SN的标识(如源MN发送的切换请求消息中携带的候选SN的标识)能知道切换前后的候选SN是否相同。
应理解，对于多个候选SN的情况，目标MN可以分别进行判断。
上述方案例如可以适用于切换前为MN触发的CPC，切换之后为CPA的场景，或者也可以适用于切换前为SN触发的CPC，切换之后为CPA的场景。
场景5，切换前为CPC，切换之后为DC的场景。
目标MN决定为终端设备配置DC，即为终端设备配置一个SN(此时不称为候选SN，如可以称为SN或者也可以称为目标SN)。
如果目标MN决定配置的SN和切换之前的候选SN相同，即目标MN决定把某个候选SN作为配置的SN，目标MN向该SN发送SN建立请求消息，该消息中携带切换之前终端设备在候选SN的标识。
示例地，目标MN可以根据源MN发送的候选SN的标识(如源MN发送的切换请求消息中携带的候选SN的标识)能知道切换前后的SN是否相同。
应理解，对于配置多个SN的情况，目标MN可以分别进行判断。
上述方案例如可以适用于切换前为MN触发的CPC，切换之后为DC的场景，或者也 可以适用于切换前为SN触发的CPC，切换之后为DC的场景。
上述结合五种场景，介绍了目标MN向SN发送SN增加请求消息，应理解，在不同场景下，可以根据各个场景的情况，适应性调整。
1240，目标MN向源MN发送切换请求响应消息。
此外，目标MN还可以向源MN发送指示信息#3，用于指示使用或保持候选SN中与终端设备相关的信息。
其中，候选SN中与终端设备相关的信息，例如可以包括以下中的一项或多项：候选SN中终端设备的上下文、候选SN之前进行的早期数据转移的信息。
可选地，目标MN还可以向源MN发送指示保持哪些候选SN中终端设备的上下文或指示保留哪些候选SN之前进行的早期数据转移，如可以通过携带候选SN的标识的方式指示。例如，指示信息#3中或者切换请求响应消息中携带一个或多个候选SN的标识，通过该方式，指示保持该一个或多个候选SN中终端设备的上下文或指示保留该一个或多个候选SN之前进行的早期数据转移。
指示信息#3可以携带于切换请求响应消息中，也可以单独发送，对此不作限定。
1250，源MN向候选SN发送SN释放请求消息。
如图12所示，目标MN可以向候选SN1、候选SN2发送SN释放请求消息。
此外，源MN还可以向候选SN发送指示信息#3，用于指示使用或保持候选SN中与终端设备相关的信息。
指示信息#3可以携带于SN释放请求消息中，也可以单独发送送，对此不作限定。
1260，源MN向目标MN指示候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。
可选地，源MN向目标MN发送每个候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。
候选SN的早期数据转移的信息例如可以包括以下一项或多项：源MN已经向候选SN进行了哪些数据包的早期数据转移(比如通过PDCP SN或NR-U序列号来指示)，候选SN可以丢弃哪些早期数据转移的数据包。可选地，之后，目标MN可以通知候选SN可以丢弃哪些早期数据转移的数据包。应理解，此处可以包括SN终止的bearer的早期数据转移。
下面结合几种场景进行说明。
场景1，切换前为CPA，切换之后为CPA的场景。
在该场景下，源MN可以向目标MN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。
在该场景下，源MN可以把承载中的数据转移给目标MN。比如，把还没有被终端设备正确接收的下行数据包转移给目标MN，又如把从终端设备侧乱序接收的上行数据包转移给目标MN。
场景2，切换前为CPA，切换之后为DC的场景。
在该场景下，至少可以包括以下两种实现方案。
方案1，源MN继续向候选SN进行早期数据转移。
在该方案下，源MN无需向目标MN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。当源MN把从核心网收到的结束标记(end marker)之前的对应该承载的数据包都转移给候选SN之后，源MN可以向候选SN发送一个指示信息#4，指示已经把对应承载的数据包都转移给候选SN。例如，该指示信息#4可以是一个用户面的指示，如一个结束指示end marker。 或者，该指示信息#4也可能是一个控制面的指示，即在控制面向候选SN发送该指示信息#4。在该方案下，切换前的候选SN为切换后的SN。
在本申请实施例中，为区分，用指示信息#4表示用于指示已经把对应承载的数据包都转移给候选SN。关于指示的形式，可以是通过指示信息#4中的具体内容指示，或者也可以是通过发送指示信息#4的动作指示，对此不作限定。
此外，源MN可以直接向候选SN发送指示信息#4，也可以通过目标MN向候选SN发送指示信息#4。当候选SN(该场景下也为切换后的SN)收到该指示信息#4之后，候选SN就可以开始把从核心网直接收到的对应该承载的新数据包发送给终端设备。在本方案中，候选SN可以把之前从源MN收到的早期数据转移数据包作为切换之后需要发送给终端设备的数据，从而避免了源MN把数据包转移给目标MN，再由目标MN发送给SN带来的时延。
方案2，源MN停止向候选SN进行数据转移。
在该方案下，源MN可以向目标MN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。
在该方案下，源MN可以把从核心网收到的对应该承载的数据包转移给目标MN。例如，对于切换后为SN终止的bearer，源MN可以把从核心网收到的对应该承载的数据包转移给目标MN，再由目标MN转给SN。又如，对于切换后为MN终止的SCG bearer或MN终止的split bearer，源MN可以把从核心网收到的对应该承载的数据包转移给目标MN，再由目标MN处理之后(如从PDCP SDU变为PDCP PDU)，发送给SN。在该方案下，切换前的为切换后的SN。
应理解，上述两种方案仅是示例性说明，对此不作限定。例如，源MN可以继续向候选SN转移部分数据包，并且将其余数据包通过目标MN发送给SN。
场景3，切换前为CPC，切换之后为CPC的场景。
场景3同场景1(即切换前为CPA，切换之后为CPA的场景)相似。例如在该场景3下，源MN可以把承载中的数据转移给目标MN。比如，把还没有被终端设备正确接收的下行数据包转移给目标MN，又如把从终端设备侧乱序接收的上行数据包转移给目标MN。
此外，场景3中，关于触发CPC的设备不作限定。例如，场景3可以为切换前为MN触发的CPC，切换之后为MN触发的CPC的场景。或者场景3可以为切换前为SN触发的CPC，切换之后为SN触发的CPC的场景。或者场景3可以为切换前为MN触发的CPC，切换之后为SN触发的CPC的场景。或者场景3可以为切换前为SN触发的CPC，切换之后为MN触发的CPC的场景。
场景4，切换前为CPC，切换之后为CPA的场景。
在该场景下，源MN可以向目标MN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。
在该场景下，源MN可以把承载中的数据转移给目标MN。比如，把还没有被终端设备正确接收的下行数据包转移给目标MN，又如把从终端设备侧乱序接收的上行数据包转移给目标MN。
场景4中关于触发CPC的设备不作限定。例如，场景4可以为切换前为MN触发的CPC，切换之后为CPA的场景。或者场景4可以为切换前为SN触发的CPC，切换之后为CPA的场景。
场景5，切换前为CPC，切换之后为DC的场景。
(1)对于切换前源MN与候选SN之间的早期数据转移，如源MN与候选SN之间对源MN中的MN终止的bearer与CPC中候选SN中的SN终止的bearer之间的早期数据转移(即切换前，把CPC前的MN终止的bearer上的数据包进行早期数据转到CPC中的SN终止的bearer的数据包)。
一种可能的方案，可以采用上场景2的方案1；又一种可能的方案，可以采用上场景2的方案2。
(2)对于切换前源SN与候选SN之间的早期数据转移，如源SN与候选SN之间早对为源SN中的SN终止的bearer与CPC中候选SN中的SN终止的bearer之间的早期数据转移(即切换前，把CPC前的源SN中的SN终止的bearer上的数据包进行早期数据转到CPC中候选SN中的SN终止的bearer的数据包)。
一种可能的方案，源SN可以继续向候选SN进行数据转移。在该方案下，源MN无需向目标MN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。当源SN把从核心网收到的end marker之前的对应该承载的数据包都转移给候选SN之后，源SN可以向候选SN发送一个指示信息#4，指示已经把对应承载的数据包都转移给候选SN。例如，该指示信息#4可以是一个用户面的指示，如一个结束指示end marker。或者，该指示信息#4也可能是一个控制面的指示，即在控制面向候选SN发送该指示信息#4。此外，源SN可以直接向候选SN发送该指示信息#4，也可以通过目标MN向候选SN发送该指示信息#4。当候选SN收到该指示信息#4之后，候选SN就可以把从核心网收到的对应该承载的新数据包发送给终端设备。
又一可能的方案，源SN停止向候选SN进行数据转移。在该方案下，源MN可以向目标MN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。另外，源SN可以把从核心网收到的对应该承载的数据包转移给目标MN，再由目标MN转给SN。
应理解，场景5中，关于触发CPC的设备不作限定。例如，场景5可以为切换前为MN触发的CPC，切换之后为DC的场景。或者场景5可以为切换前为SN触发的CPC，切换之后为DC的场景。
基于上述方案，目标MN可以获知切换前网络侧配置的候选SN的相关信息(如切换前网络侧配置的候选SN的标识及终端设备在候选SN的标识)。目标MN可以向候选SN发送终端设备在候选SN的标识。因此，在切换之前进行了CPAC中的早期数据转移，在切换之后，网络侧可以继续利用之前早期数据转移中转移的数据。如果切换之后还配置了CPAC，则对于这些数据无需再进行早期数据转移。如果切换之后配置了DC，则对于这些数据可以无需进行正常数据转移(即MN终止的承载与SN终止的承载之间的传统的数据转移)。
上文结合图12所示的步骤1210-1260示例地介绍了切换前配置了CPAC，之后发生了MN切换的场景，应理解，上述各个步骤仅是示例性说明，对此不作严格限定。此外，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
图13是适用于本申请实施例的切换前配置了CPC，之后发生了SN切换的场景的示意性流程图。
如图13所示，方法1300主要以终端设备、MN、源SN、候选SN1、候选SN2、以及 目标SN之间的交互为例进行示例性说明。为区分，用源SN表示切换前的SN，用目标SN表示切换后的SN。应理解，源SN和目标SN是为区分作的命名，其具体命名方式不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。图13所示的方法1300可以包括如下步骤。
1310，网络侧为终端设备配置CPC。
对于步骤1310本申请实施例不作限定，例如，可以参考上述步骤910和920的描述，也可以参考步骤1010和1020的描述，也可以参考步骤1110和1120的描述。步骤1310可以参考现有技术或以后出现的方式，此处不再介绍。
1320，源SN或MN向目标SN发送切换前网络侧配置的候选SN的相关信息。
候选SN的相关信息，例如可以包括以下中的一项或多项：切换前网络侧配置的候选SN的标识，终端设备在候选SN的标识。
应理解，任何可以使得目标SN获知切换前网络侧配置的候选SN的相关信息的方式，都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。例如，可以是如图13所示的由源SN发送，或者也可以是其他方式(如通过源MN转发)，对此不作限定。
下面结合几种场景进行说明。
场景A，切换前为MN触发CPC，切换之后为SN触发CPC的场景。
源SN触发SN切换时，比如源SN向MN发送SN改变需要消息，该SN改变需要消息中可以携带目标SN的标识。
MN收到源SN发送的SN改变需要消息后，可以向目标SN发送候选SN的相关信息(如切换前的候选SN的标识以及终端设备在候选SN的标识)。例如，MN收到源SN发送的SN改变需要消息后，可以向目标SN发送SN增加请求消息，该SN增加请求消息中可以携带候选SN的相关信息。
MN触发SN切换，比如MN向目标SN发送SN增加请求消息，该SN增加请求消息中可以携带候选SN的相关信息。
场景B，切换前为SN触发CPC，切换之后为SN触发CPC的场景。
源SN触发SN切换时，比如源SN向MN发送SN改变需要消息，该SN改变需要消息中可以携带源SN向目标SN发送的信息(如候选SN的相关信息)。MN收到源SN发送的SN改变需要消息后，可以向目标SN发送候选SN的相关信息(如切换前的候选SN的标识以及终端设备在候选SN的标识)。例如，MN收到源SN发送的SN改变需要消息后，可以向目标SN发送SN增加请求消息，该SN增加请求消息中可以携带候选SN的相关信息。
也就是说，在场景B中，源SN可以先向MN发送候选SN的相关信息(如切换前的候选SN的标识以及终端设备在候选SN的标识)，之后MN再向目标SN发送该候选SN的相关信息(比如在SN增加请求消息中携带)。
MN触发SN切换，比如MN向目标SN发送SN增加请求消息，该SN增加请求消息中可以携带候选SN的相关信息。
场景C，切换前为MN触发CPC，切换之后为DC的场景。
源MN触发SN切换下，比如源MN向目标SN发送候选SN的相关信息(如切换前的候选SN的标识以及终端设备在候选SN的标识)。例如，MN向目标SN发送SN增加请求消息，该SN增加请求消息中可以携带候选SN的相关信息。
场景D，对于切换前为SN触发CPC，切换之后为DC的场景。
源SN触发SN切换下，比如源SN向MN发送SN改变需要消息，该SN改变需要消息中可以携带目标SN的标识和候选SN的相关信息。
MN收到源SN发送的SN改变需要消息后，可以向目标SN发送SN增加请求消息，该SN增加请求消息中可以携带候选SN的相关信息。
源MN触发SN切换下，同场景C的方案相似，此处不再赘述。
上述结合四种场景，介绍了目标SN获得切换前网络侧配置的候选SN的相关信息，应理解，在不同场景下，可以根据各个场景的情况，适应性调整。只要使得目标SN最终获得切换前网络侧配置的候选SN的相关信息的方案，都适用于本申请实施例。
1330，目标SN向候选SN发送终端设备在候选SN的标识信息。
如图13所示，目标SN可以向候选SN1、候选SN2发送终端设备在候选SN的标识信息。
下面结合几种场景进行说明。
场景A，切换前为MN触发CPC，切换之后为SN触发CPC的场景。
目标SN收到MN发送的候选SN的相关信息。目标SN决定触发CPC时，且候选SN与切换前的候选SN相同时(如根据MN发送的候选SN的相关信息，确定候选SN与切换前的候选SN相同)，目标SN可以向候选SN发送信息，该信息中可以携带终端设备在候选SN的标识。
可选地，目标SN还可以向MN发送指示信息#3，该指示信息#3用于指示使用或保持候选SN中与终端设备相关的信息(例如可以包括以下中的一项或多项：候选SN中终端设备的上下文、候选SN之前进行的早期数据转移)。其中，指示信息#3可以和终端设备在候选SN的标识携带于同一消息中，或者也可以分别发送，对此不作限定。
MN收到指示信息#3后，MN可以在向候选SN发送指示信息#3，如MN向候选SN发送SN释放请求消息，该SN释放请求消息中携带指示信息#3。
场景B，切换前为SN触发CPC，切换之后为SN触发CPC的场景。
目标SN收到源SN发送的候选SN的相关信息。目标SN决定触发CPC时，且候选SN与切换前的候选SN相同时(如根据MN发送的候选SN的相关信息，确定候选SN与切换前的候选SN相同)，目标SN可以向候选SN发送信息，该信息中可以携带终端设备在候选SN的标识。
可选地，目标SN还可以向MN发送指示信息#3，该指示信息#3用于指示使用或保持候选SN中与终端设备相关的信息(例如可以包括以下中的一项或多项：候选SN中终端设备的上下文、候选SN之前进行的早期数据转移)。其中，指示信息#3可以和终端设备在候选SN的标识携带于同一消息中，或者也可以分别发送，对此不作限定。
MN收到指示信息#3后，MN可以在向候选SN发送指示信息#3，如MN向候选SN发送SN释放请求消息，该SN释放请求消息中携带指示信息#3。
可选地，在步骤1330之后，MN可以向终端设备发送配置信息，配置信息可能为DC的配置信息，也可能是CPC的配置信息。
1340，目标SN接收候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。
MN或者源SN可以向目标SN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。如，MN可以直 接向目标SN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。又如，MN可以先向源SN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息，然后再由源SN向目标SN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。图13中仅示出了源SN向目标SN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息的情况，应理解，图13仅是示例性说明，其对本申请范围不作限定。
候选SN的早期数据转移的信息例如可以包括以下一项或多项：源MN已经向候选SN进行了哪些数据包的早期数据转移(比如通过PDCP SN或NR-U序列号来指示)，候选SN可以丢弃哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
下面结合几种场景进行说明。
场景A，切换前为MN触发CPC，切换之后为SN触发CPC的场景。
在该场景下，MN可以向目标SN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。
目标SN接收到候选SN的早期数据转移的信息后，可以通知候选SN可以丢弃哪些早期数据转移的数据包，即目标SN可以向候选SN发送指示信息#1。
此外，目标SN可以根据MN已经向候选SN进行了哪些数据包的早期数据转移，来决定需要向候选SN进行哪些数据包的早期数据转移。
此外，在步骤1340之后，目标SN还可以根据自身给终端设备发送的下行数据包的情况，向候选SN发送多个指示信息#1，以指示候选SN可以丢弃哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
关于指示信息#1的内容，参考上文方法900中的描述，此处不再赘述。
场景B，切换前为SN触发CPC，切换之后为SN触发CPC的场景。
在该场景下，MN或者源SN可以向目标SN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。目标SN接收到候选SN的早期数据转移的信息后，可以通知候选SN可以丢弃哪些早期数据转移的数据包，即目标SN可以向候选SN发送指示信息#1。
此外，目标SN可以根据MN已经向候选SN进行了哪些数据包的早期数据转移，以及源SN已经向候选SN进行了哪些数据包的早期数据转移，来决定需要向候选SN进行哪些数据包的早期数据转移。因此，可以尽可能地避免转移重复的数据包。
此外，在步骤1340之后，目标SN还可以根据自身给终端设备发送的下行数据包的情况，向候选SN发送多个指示信息#1，以指示候选SN可以丢弃哪些早期数据转移的数据包。
场景C，切换前为MN触发CPC，切换之后为DC的场景。
在该场景下，MN可以向目标SN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。
场景D，切换前为SN触发CPC，切换之后为DC的场景。
在该场景下，MN或者源SN可以向目标SN发送候选SN的早期数据转移的信息。
上述结合四种场景，介绍了目标SN接收候选SN的早期数据转移的信息，应理解，在不同场景下，可以根据各个场景的情况，适应性调整。只要使得目标SN获知候选SN的早期数据转移的信息的方案，都适用于本申请实施例。
1350，目标SN向终端设备发送下行数据。
下面结合几种场景进行说明。
场景A，切换前为MN触发CPC，切换之后为SN触发CPC的场景。
当终端设备判断出候选PSCell的触发条件满足且接入到候选PSCell之后，候选SN 可以根据最近的早期数据转移的信息及早期转移的数据向终端设备发送下行数据。例如，候选SN可以根据最近的指示信息#1及早期转移的数据向终端设备发送下行数据，如丢弃指示信息#1中指示的丢弃的数据包，向终端设备发送早期转移的数据包中的其余数据包。
场景B，切换前为SN触发CPC，切换之后为SN触发CPC的场景。
同场景A的方案相似，此处不再赘述。
场景C，切换前为MN触发CPC，切换之后为DC的场景。
当终端设备判断出候选PSCell的触发条件满足且接入到候选PSCell之后，SN根据可以将之前早期数据转移中的数据发送给终端设备。
场景D，切换前为SN触发CPC，切换之后为MR-DC的场景。
同场景C的方案相似，此处不再赘述。
基于上述方案，目标SN获知切换前网络侧配置的候选SN的相关信息(如切换前网络侧配置的候选SN的标识及终端设备在候选SN的标识)，目标SN可以向候选SN发送切换前终端设备在候选SN的标识。此外，目标SN可以接收切换前候选SN的早期数据转移的信息，这样切换之后，网络侧可以继续利用之前早期数据转移中转移的数据。此外，如果切换之后还配置了CPC，则对于这些数据无需再进行早期数据转移。如果切换之后配置了DC，则对于这些数据可以无需进行正常数据转移(即传统的MN终止的承载与SN终止的承载之间数据转移)。
上文结合图13所示的步骤1310-1350示例地介绍了切换前配置了CPC，之后发生了SN切换的场景，应理解，上述各个步骤仅是示例性说明，对此不作严格限定。此外，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
图14是适用于本申请实施例的切换前未配置CPAC，之后发生了MN切换的场景的示意性流程图。
如图14所示，方法1400主要以终端设备、源MN、源SN、候选SN1、目标SN、以及目标MN之间的交互为例进行示例性说明。为区分，用源SN表示切换前的SN，用目标SN表示切换后的SN；用源MN表示切换前的MN，用目标MN表示切换后的MN。应理解，源SN和目标SN、以及源MN和目标MN均是为区分作的命名，其具体命名方式不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。图14所示的方法1400可以包括如下步骤。
1410，网络侧为终端设备配置DC。
例如，MN向SN发送SN增加请求消息，SN向MN反馈SN增加请求响应。MN可以通知终端设备配置DC，例如，MN向终端设备发送RRC重配消息，该RRC重配消息中通知终端设备配置DC。
上述仅是示例性说明，对于步骤1410本申请实施例不作限定。例如，步骤1410可以参考现有技术或以后出现的方式。
1420，源MN向目标MN发送切换请求消息。
可选地，源MN还可以向目标MN发送切换前的SN的标识以及终端设备在SN的标识。例如，切换请求消息中携带切换前的SN的标识以及终端设备在SN的标识。
1430，目标MN向目标SN或候选SN发送SN增加请求消息。
可选地，目标MN还可以向目标SN或候选SN发送切换前终端设备在SN的标识。 例如，SN增加请求消息中携带切换前终端设备在SN的标识。
应理解，目标SN可能是切换前的SN，也可能不是切换前的SN，对此不作限定。
下面结合三种情况说明。
一可能的情况，切换后为CPA。
在该情况下，在步骤1430中，目标MN向候选SN发送SN增加请求消息。
在该情况下，源SN可以向目标MN进行数据转移。例如，源SN直接向目标MN进行数据转移；又如，源SN可以将数据包先转移给源MN，再由源MN向目标MN发送这些转移的数据包。
目标MN可以根据源SN转移的数据包，获知之前该候选SN已经收到了哪些数据包，这样目标MN与候选SN之间的早期数据转移就无需对这些数据包进行数据转移。一可能的方式，目标MN根据源MN发送的序列号状态转移(SN status transfer)中携带的目标MN需要分配的下行序列号，以及从源MN收到的数据包，就知道之前该候选SN已经收到了哪些数据包。
又一可能的情况，切换后为MN触发的CPC。
在该情况下，在步骤1430中，目标MN向候选SN发送SN增加请求消息。
在该情况下，源SN可以向目标SN进行数据转移。例如，源SN直接向目标SN进行数据转移；又如，源SN可以将数据包先转移给源MN，再由源MN转移给目标MN，再由目标MN向目标SN发送这些转移的数据包。
目标SN可以根据源SN转移的数据包，获知之前该候选SN已经收到了哪些数据包。具体的方式，可以参考上述第一种情况中的方式。
又一可能的情况，切换后为SN触发的CPC。
在该情况下，在步骤1430中，目标MN向目标SN发送SN增加请求消息。之后目标S可以向候选SN发送切换之前终端设备在SN的标识。
此外，源SN可以向目标SN进行数据转移。且目标SN可以根据源SN转移的数据包，获知之前该候选SN已经收到了哪些数据包。具体地，参考上述第二种情况，此处不再赘述。
上述结合三种情况进行了示例性说明，对此不作严格限定。
可选地，在步骤1430之后，目标MN还可以向终端设备发送配置信息，配置信息中包括CPAC的配置信息。
1440，候选SN接收指示信息#3，指示使用或保持候选SN中与终端设备相关的信息。
其中，候选SN中与终端设备相关的信息，例如可以包括以下中的一项或多项：候选SN中终端设备的上下文、候选SN之前进行的早期数据转移。
示例地，如图14所示，在步骤1440中，候选SN1接收指示信息#3，指示继续利用切换前收到的数据包作为早期数据转移的数据包。
此外，对于切换后为CPA或MN触发的CPC，在步骤1440中，目标MN向候选SN发送指示信息#3。对于切换后为SN触发的CPC，在步骤1440中，目标SN向候选SN发送指示信息#3；或者目标SN先发送给MN，再由MN发送给候选SN。
关于指示信息#3参考上文描述，此处不再赘述。
1450，候选SN向终端设备发送下行数据。
可选地，在此步骤之前，候选SN可以接收指示信息#1，指示信息#1用于通知候选SN可以丢弃哪些早期数据转移的数据包。候选SN可能从MN接收该指示信息#1，也可能从目标SN接收该指示信息#1。
当终端设备判断出候选PSCell的触发条件满足时，终端设备接入候选PSCell。例如终端设备与候选PSCell进行随机接入过程。
终端设备接入到候选SN，候选SN可以按照指示信息#1及早期数据转移的信息把早期数据转移中的数据包(包括在切换前收到的数据包)发送给终端设备。或者候选SN知道切换前的SN和切换后的候选是同一个SN，候选SN就可以根据收到的最近的指示信息#1把早期数据转移中的数据包(包括在切换前收到的数据包)发送给终端设备。
基于上述方案，针对切换前未配置CPAC，之后发生了MN切换的场景，目标MN为终端设备配置CPAC的早期数据转移。对于MN切换之后配置的CPAC中的SN终止的承载，可以利用切换之前候选SN已经收到的数据包作为早期数据转移的数据包，从而避免在早期数据转移中对这些数据包再进行一次转移，可以减少这些数据包的传输时延。
上文结合图14所示的步骤1410-1450示例地介绍了切换前未配置CPAC，之后发生了MN切换的场景，应理解，上述各个步骤仅是示例性说明，对此不作严格限定。此外，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
应理解，在上述一些实施例中，涉及到一些消息名称，如早期数据转移(或者说早期数据传输)、SN增加请求消息、指示信息#1、指示信息#2，等等，应理解，其命名不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。
还应理解，在上述一些实施例中，主要以基站为例进行了示例性说明(如MN、SN)，应理解，其他形式的网络设备，都适用于本申请实施例。
还应理解，在上述一些实施例中，多次提及关于SN增加请求消息，其也可以记为增加SN请求消息，其命名不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。
还应理解，在上述一些实施例中，在增加PSCell的情况下，发送SN增加请求消息，该SN增加请求消息是为了条件SN增加；在改变PSCell的情况下，发送SN增加请求消息，该SN增加请求消息是为了条件SN改变。上述仅是示例性说明，关于SN增加请求消息具体指示的内容不作严格限定。例如，不管是在增加PSCell的情况下，还是在改变PSCell的情况下，发送SN增加请求消息，该SN增加请求消息是为了条件SN增加。也就是说，可以定义SN增加请求消息是为了条件SN增加，具体的不区分是SN改变还是SN增加。
还应理解，在上述一些实施例中，多次提及转移数据包，其主要是用于表示将未传输的数据包，和/或，传输失败的数据包进行转移。此处，该数据包可以是上行数据包，也可以是下行数据包，对此不作限定。例如，源网络设备可以将待向终端设备发送的下行数据包转移给目标网络设备。又如，源网络设备可以把从终端设备侧乱序接收的上行数据包转移给目标网络设备。
还应理解，图12至图14中MN与SN之间的早期数据转移包括对CPAC中候选SN中的SN终止的SCG/MCG/split bearer的早期数据转移，还可能包括MN与SN之间进行MN中的MN终止的SCG/Split bearer的早期数据转移。除非特别说明的情况，本申请并 不限定早期数据转移的数据包的形式。
本文中描述的各个实施例可以为独立的方案，也可以根据内在逻辑进行组合，这些方案都落入本申请的保护范围中。
可以理解的是，上述各个方法实施例中，由终端设备实现的方法和操作，也可以由可用于终端设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现，由网络设备(如MN、SN)实现的方法和操作，也可以由可用于网络设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现。
以上，结合图7至图14详细说明了本申请实施例提供的方法。以下，结合图15至图17详细说明本申请实施例提供的数据传输的装置。应理解，装置实施例的描述与方法实施例的描述相互对应，因此，未详细描述的内容可以参见上文方法实施例，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
图15是本申请实施例提供的数据传输的装置的示意性框图。该装置1500包括收发单元1510和处理单元1520。收发单元1510可以实现相应的通信功能，处理单元1520用于进行数据处理。收发单元1510还可以称为通信接口或通信单元。
可选地，该装置1500还可以包括存储单元，该存储单元可以用于存储指令和/或数据，处理单元1520可以读取存储单元中的指令和/或数据，以使得装置实现前述方法实施例。
该装置1500可以用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备所执行的动作，这时，该装置1500可以为网络设备或者可配置于网络设备的部件，收发单元1510用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备侧的收发相关的操作，处理单元1520用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备侧的处理相关的操作。
作为一种设计，该装置1500用于执行上文方法实施例中主网络设备(如MN)所执行的动作。
一种可能的实现方式，处理单元1520，用于为终端设备配置基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变；收发单元1510，用于向候选PSCell所属的网络设备进行早期数据传输，早期数据传输是指在终端设备接入候选PSCell之前，向候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送一个或多个数据包，数据包的形式为分组数据汇聚层协议的协议数据单元；一个或多个数据包包括：为终端设备配置的MN终止的辅小区组承载上的数据包，和/或，为终端设备配置的MN终止的分裂承载上的数据包。
一示例，收发单元1510，还用于向候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示进行MN终止的辅小区组承载和/或MN终止的分裂承载的早期数据传输。
又一示例，收发单元1510，还用于向候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示丢弃或忽略一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包。
又一示例，第二指示信息包括一个或多个序列号的信息，一个或多个序列号的信息用于指示丢弃或忽略一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包。
又一示例，序列号为分组数据汇聚协议序列号或新空口用户面序列号。
又一示例，收发单元1510，具体用于满足预设条件的情况下，向候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送第二指示信息。
该装置1500可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法实施例中的主网络设备(如MN)执行的步骤或者流程，该装置1500可以包括用于执行图7、图9至图11中的主网络设备 (如MN)执行的方法的单元。并且，该装置1500中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图7、图9至图11中的主网络设备(如MN)中的方法实施例的相应流程。
其中，当该装置1500用于执行图7中的方法700时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法700中的步骤720；处理单元1520可用于执行方法700中的处理步骤，如步骤710。
当该装置1500用于执行图9中的方法900时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法900中的步骤920、940；处理单元1520可用于执行方法900中的处理步骤，如步骤910。
当该装置1500用于执行图10中的方法1000时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法1000中的步骤1020、1040；处理单元1520可用于执行方法1000中的处理步骤，如步骤1010。
当该装置1500用于执行图11中的方法1100时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法1100中的步骤1120、1140；处理单元1520可用于执行方法1100中的处理步骤，如步骤1110。
应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
作为另一种设计，该装置1500用于执行上文方法实施例中候选网络设备(如候选SN)所执行的动作。
一种可能的实现方式，收发单元1510，用于从MN接收一个或多个数据包，数据包的形式为分组数据汇聚层协议的协议数据单元，一个或多个数据包包括：为终端设备配置的MN终止的辅小区组承载上的数据包，和/或，为终端设备配置的MN终止的分裂承载上的数据包；处理单元1520，用于接入终端设备；收发单元1510，还用于向终端设备发送一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包；其中，终端设备配置了基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变。
一示例，收发单元1510，还用于接收第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示丢弃或忽略一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包；收发单元1510，具体用于根据一个或多个数据包以及第二指示信息，向终端设备发送数据。
又一示例，第二指示信息包括一个或多个序列号的信息，一个或多个序列号的信息用于指示丢弃或忽略一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包。
又一示例，序列号为分组数据汇聚协议序列号或新空口用户面序列号。
又一示例，收发单元1510，具体用于周期性地接收第二指示信息。
该装置1500可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法实施例中的候选网络设备(如候选SN)执行的步骤或者流程，该装置1500可以包括用于执行图7、图9至图11中的候选网络设备(如候选SN)执行的方法的单元。并且，该装置1500中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图7、图9至图11中的SN中的候选网络设备(如候选SN)中的方法实施例的相应流程。
其中，当该装置1500用于执行图7中的方法700时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法700中的步骤720、730；处理单元1520可用于执行方法700中的处理步骤，如步骤710。
当该装置1500用于执行图9中的方法900时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法900中的步骤940、950、960；处理单元1520可用于执行方法900中的处理步骤，如步骤910。
当该装置1500用于执行图10中的方法1000时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法1000中的步骤1040、1050、1060；处理单元1520可用于执行方法1000中的处理步骤，如步骤1010。
当该装置1500用于执行图11中的方法1100时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法1100中的步骤1140、1150、1160；处理单元1520可用于执行方法1100中的处理步骤，如步骤1110。
应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
作为另一种设计，该装置1500用于执行上文方法实施例中源网络设备(如源MN或源SN)所执行的动作。
一种可能的实现方式，处理单元1520，用于确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括第二网络设备，其中，在终端设备从装置1500切换至目标网络设备之前，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备的情况下，从终端设备装置1500切换至目标网络设备之后，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，第二网络设备属于为终端设备提供服务的网络设备；或者，在终端设备从装置1500切换至目标网络设备之后，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备的情况下，从终端设备装置1500切换至目标网络设备之前，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，第二网络设备属于为终端设备提供服务的网络设备；收发单元1510，用于向第二网络设备发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示使用第二网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。
一示例，与终端设备相关的信息，包括以下一项或多项：终端设备的上下文信息、已向第二网络设备传输的终端设备的数据包、第二网络设备可以丢弃的终端设备的数据包的信息。
又一示例，收发单元1510，还用于接收来自目标网络设备发送的第二网络设备的标识信息；处理单元1520，具体用于根据第二网络设备的标识信息，确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括第二网络设备。
又一示例，收发单元1510，还用于向目标网络设备发送第二网络设备的早期数据传输信息。
又一示例，收发单元1510，还用于向目标网络设备发送一个或多个网络设备的信息，其中，一个或多个网络设备包括第二网络设备，一个或多个网络设备为：终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前，为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，为终端设备提供服务的网络设备，一个或多个网络设备的信息包括以下一项或多项：一个或多个网络设备的标识信息、终端设备在一个或多个网络设备的标识信息。
又一示例，收发单元1510，具体用于向目标网络设备发送切换请求消息，切换请求消息中包括一个或多个网络设备的信息。
又一示例，收发单元1510，还用于向目标网络设备或者第二网络设备发送待向终端设备发送的数据包。
又一示例，目标网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备，装置1500为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备；或者，目标网络设备 为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备，装置1500为载波聚合场景下的网络设备；或者，目标网络设备为载波聚合场景下的网络设备，装置1500为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备。
该装置1500可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法实施例中的源网络设备(如源MN或源SN)执行的步骤或者流程，该装置1500可以包括用于执行图8、图12至图14中的源网络设备(如源MN或源SN)执行的方法的单元。并且，该装置1500中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图8、图12至图14中的方法实施例的相应流程。
其中，当该装置1500用于执行图8中的方法800时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法800中的步骤8202、840；处理单元1520可用于执行方^800中的处理步骤，如步骤830。
当该装置1500用于执行图12中的方法1200时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法1200中的步骤1220、1240、1250、1260；处理单元1520可用于执行方法1200中的处理步骤，如步骤1210。
当该装置1500用于执行图13中的方法1300时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法1300中的步骤1320、1340；处理单元1520可用于执行方法1300中的处理步骤，如步骤1310。
当该装置1500用于执行图14中的方法1400时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法1400中的步骤1420；处理单元1520可用于执行方法1400中的处理步骤，如步骤1410。
应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
作为另一种设计，装置1500用于执行上文方法实施例中目标网络设备(如目标MN或目标SN)所执行的动作。
一种可能的实现方式，处理单元1520，用于确定为终端设备配置N个第一网络设备，N个第一网络设备包括第二网络设备，N为大于1或等于1的整数，其中，在终端设备从源网络设备切换至装置1500之前，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备的情况下，终端设备从源网络设备切换至装置1500之后，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，第二网络设备属于为终端设备提供服务的网络设备；或者，在终端设备从源网络设备切换至装置1500之后，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备的情况下，终端设备从源网络设备切换至装置1500之前，第二网络设备属于为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，第二网络设备属于为终端设备提供服务的网络设备；收发单元1510，用于发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示使用第二网络设备中与终端设备相关的信息。
一示例，与终端设备相关的信息，包括以下一项或多项：终端设备的上下文信息、已向第二网络设备传输的终端设备的数据包、第二网络设备可以丢弃的终端设备的数据包的信息。
又一示例，收发单元1510，具体用于向第二网络设备发送第三指示信息；或者，向源网络设备发送第三指示信息。
又一示例，收发单元1510，还用于接收源网络设备发送的第二网络设备的早期数据传输信息。
又一示例，收发单元1510，还用于根据第二网络设备的早期数据传输信息，与第二网络设备进行早期数据传输。
又一示例，收发单元1510，还用于向源网络设备发送第二网络设备的标识信息。
又一示例，收发单元1510，还用于接收来自源网络设备的一个或多个网络设备的信息，其中，一个或多个网络设备包括第二网络设备，一个或多个网络设备为：终端设备从源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前，为终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，为终端设备提供服务的网络设备，一个或多个网络设备的信息包括以下一项或多项：一个或多个网络设备的标识信息、终端设备在一个或多个网络设备的标识信息。
又一示例，一个或多个网络设备的信息包括一个或多个网络设备的标识信息，处理单元1520，还用于根据一个或多个网络设备的标识信息，确定N个第一网络设备包括第二网络设备。
又一示例，收发单元1510，具体用于接收切换请求消息，切换请求消息中包括一个或多个网络设备的信息。
又一示例，装置1500为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备，源网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备；或者，装置1500为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备，源网络设备为载波聚合场景下的网络设备；或者，装置1500为载波聚合场景下的网络设备，源网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备。
该装置1500可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法实施例中的目标网络设备(如目标MN或目标SN)执行的步骤或者流程，该装置1500可以包括用于执行图8、图12至图14中的目标网络设备(如目标MN或目标SN)执行的方法的单元。并且，该装置1500中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图8、图12至图14中的方法实施例的相应流程。
其中，当该装置1500用于执行图8中的方法800时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法800中的步骤8201、8201、840；处理单元1520可用于执行方法800中的处理步骤，如步骤810。
当该装置1500用于执行图12中的方法1200时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法1200中的步骤1220、1230、1240、1260；处理单元1520可用于执行方法1200中的处理步骤。
当该装置1500用于执行图13中的方法1300时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法1300中的步骤1320、1330、1340；处理单元1520可用于执行方法1300中的处理步骤。
当该装置1500用于执行图14中的方法1400时，收发单元1510可用于执行方法1400中的步骤1420、1430、1440；处理单元1520可用于执行方法1400中的处理步骤。
应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
上文实施例中的处理单元1520可以由至少一个处理器或处理器相关电路实现。收发单元1510可以由收发器或收发器相关电路实现。存储单元可以通过至少一个存储器实现。
如图16所示，本申请实施例还提供一种数据传输的装置1600。该装置1600包括处理器1610，处理器1610与存储器1620耦合，存储器1620用于存储计算机程序或指令和 /或数据，处理器1610用于执行存储器1620存储的计算机程序或指令和/或数据，使得上文方法实施例中的方法被执行。
可选地，该装置1600包括的处理器1610为一个或多个。
可选地，如图16所示，该装置1600还可以包括存储器1620。
可选地，该装置1600包括的存储器1620可以为一个或多个。
可选地，该存储器1620可以与该处理器1610集成在一起，或者分离设置。
可选地，如图16所示，该装置1600还可以包括收发器1630，收发器1630用于信号的接收和/或发送。例如，处理器1610用于控制收发器1630进行信号的接收和/或发送。
作为一种方案，该装置1600用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备执行的操作。
例如，处理器1610用于实现上文方法实施例中由主网络设备(如MN)执行的处理相关的操作，收发器1630用于实现上文方法实施例中由主网络设备执行的收发相关的操作。
又如，处理器1610用于实现上文方法实施例中由候选网络设备(如候选SN)执行的处理相关的操作，收发器1630用于实现上文方法实施例中由候选网络设备执行的收发相关的操作。
又如，处理器1610用于实现上文方法实施例中由源网络设备(如源MN或源SN)执行的处理相关的操作，收发器1630用于实现上文方法实施例中由源网络设备执行的收发相关的操作。
又如，处理器1610用于实现上文方法实施例中由目标网络设备(如目标MN或目标SN)执行的处理相关的操作，收发器1630用于实现上文方法实施例中由目标网络设备执行的收发相关的操作。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置1700，该通信装置1700可以是网络设备也可以是芯片。该通信装置1700可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由网络设备所执行的操作。
当该通信装置1700为网络设备时，例如为基站。图17示出了一种简化的基站结构示意图。基站包括1710部分以及1720部分。1710部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换；1720部分主要用于基带处理，对基站进行控制等。1710部分通常可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等。1720部分通常是基站的控制中心，通常可以称为处理单元，用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中接收端设备侧的处理操作。
1710部分的收发单元，也可以称为收发机或收发器等，其包括天线和射频电路，其中射频电路主要用于进行射频处理。可选地，可以将1710部分中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即1710部分包括接收单元和发送单元。接收单元也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等，发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
1720部分可以包括一个或多个单板，每个单板可以包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。处理器用于读取和执行存储器中的程序以实现基带处理功能以及对基站的控制。若存在多个单板，各个单板之间可以互联以增强处理能力。作为一种可选的实施方式，也可以是多个单板共用一个或多个处理器，或者是多个单板共用一个或多个存储器，或者是多个单板同时共用一个或多个处理器。
应理解，图17仅为示例而非限定，上述包括收发单元和处理单元的网络设备可以不依赖于图17所示的结构。
当该装置1700为芯片时，该芯片包括收发单元和处理单元。其中，收发单元可以是输入输出电路、通信接口；处理单元为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。当然装置1700还可以为一个芯片系统或处理系统，使得安装该装置1700的设备可以实现本申请实施例的方法和功能。例如，处理单元1720可以为芯片系统或处理系统中的处理电路，实现对安装了该芯片系统或处理系统的设备的控制，还可以耦合链接存储单元，调用存储单元中的指令，使得设备可以实现本申请实施例的方法和功能，收发单元1710，可以为芯片系统或处理系统中的输入输出电路，将芯片系统处理好的信息输出，或将待处理的数据或信令信息输入芯片系统进行处理。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有用于实现上述方法实施例中由网络设备执行的方法的计算机指令。
例如，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，使得该计算机可以实现上述方法实施例中由网络设备执行的方法。
本申请实施例还提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，该指令被计算机执行时使得该计算机实现上述方法实施例中由网络设备执行的方法。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统，该通信系统包括上文实施例中的网络设备，如主网络设备和候选网络设备，或者，源网络设备和目标网络设备，或者，源网络设备、目标网络设备以及候选网络设备。
上述提供的任一种装置中相关内容的解释及有益效果均可参考上文提供的对应的方法实施例，此处不再赘述。
应理解，本申请实施例中提及的处理器可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)，还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
还应理解，本申请实施例中提及的存储器可以是易失性存储器和/或非易失性存储器。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)。例如，RAM可以用作外部高速缓存。作为示例而非限定，RAM可以包括如下多种形式：静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。
需要说明的是，当处理器为通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器 件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件时，存储器(存储模块)可以集成在处理器中。
还需要说明的是，本文描述的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的保护范围。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。此外，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元实现本申请提供的方案。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。例如，所述计算机可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD)等。例如，前述的可用介质可以包括但不限于：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (32)

  1. 一种数据传输的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    为终端设备配置基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变；
    向所述候选PSCell所属的网络设备进行早期数据传输，所述早期数据传输是指在所述终端设备接入所述候选PSCell之前，向所述候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送一个或多个数据包，所述数据包的形式为分组数据汇聚层协议的协议数据单元；
    所述一个或多个数据包包括：为所述终端设备配置的主基站MN终止的辅小区组承载上的数据包，和/或，为所述终端设备配置的MN终止的分裂承载上的数据包。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向所述候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示进行MN终止的辅小区组承载和/或MN终止的分裂承载的早期数据传输。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向所述候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示丢弃或忽略所述一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二指示信息包括一个或多个序列号的信息，所述一个或多个序列号的信息用于指示丢弃或忽略所述一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述序列号为分组数据汇聚协议序列号或新空口用户面序列号。
  6. 根据权利要求3至5中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述向所述候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送第二指示信息，包括：
    满足预设条件的情况下，向所述候选PSCell所属的网络设备发送所述第二指示信息。
  7. 一种数据传输的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    在终端设备接入之前，从主基站MN接收一个或多个数据包，所述数据包的形式为分组数据汇聚层协议的协议数据单元，所述一个或多个数据包包括：为所述终端设备配置的MN终止的辅小区组承载上的数据包，和/或，为所述终端设备配置的MN终止的分裂承载上的数据包；
    在所述终端设备接入之后，向所述终端设备发送所述一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包；
    其中，所述终端设备配置了基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示丢弃或忽略所述一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包；
    所述向终端设备发送所述一个或多个数据包，包括：
    根据所述一个或多个数据包以及所述第二指示信息，向所述终端设备发送数据。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二指示信息包括一个或多个序列号的信息，所述一个或多个序列号的信息用于 指示丢弃或忽略所述一个或多个数据包中的部分或全部数据包。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述序列号为分组数据汇聚协议序列号或新空口用户面序列号。
  11. 根据权利要求8至10中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述接收第二指示信息，包括：周期性地接收所述第二指示信息。
  12. 一种数据传输的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    目标网络设备确定为终端设备配置N个第一网络设备，所述N个第一网络设备包括第二网络设备，N为大于1或等于1的整数；
    其中，在所述终端设备从源网络设备切换至所述目标网络设备之前，所述第二网络设备属于为所述终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备的情况下，所述终端设备从所述源网络设备切换至所述目标网络设备之后，所述第二网络设备属于为所述终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，所述第二网络设备属于为所述终端设备提供服务的网络设备；或者，在所述终端设备从所述源网络设备切换至所述目标网络设备之后，所述第二网络设备属于为所述终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备的情况下，所述终端设备从所述源网络设备切换至所述目标网络设备之前，所述第二网络设备属于为所述终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，所述第二网络设备属于为所述终端设备提供服务的网络设备；
    所述目标网络设备发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示使用所述第二网络设备中与所述终端设备相关的信息。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法，其特征在于，所述与所述终端设备相关的信息，包括以下一项或多项：所述终端设备的上下文信息、已向所述第二网络设备传输的所述终端设备的数据包、所述第二网络设备可以丢弃的所述终端设备的数据包的信息。
  14. 根据权利要求12或13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标网络设备发送第三指示信息，包括：
    所述目标网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送所述第三指示信息；或者，
    所述目标网络设备向所述源网络设备发送所述第三指示信息。
  15. 根据权利要求12至14中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述目标网络设备接收来自所述源网络设备的所述第二网络设备的早期数据传输信息。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述目标网络设备根据所述第二网络设备的早期数据传输信息，与所述第二网络设备进行早期数据传输。
  17. 根据权利要求12至16中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述目标网络设备向所述源网络设备发送所述第二网络设备的标识信息。
  18. 根据权利要求12至17中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述目标网络设备接收来自所述源网络设备的一个或多个网络设备的信息，其中，所述一个或多个网络设备包括所述第二网络设备，所述一个或多个网络设备为：所述终端设备从所述源网络设备切换至所述目标网络设备之前，为所述终端设备配置的基于条件的候 选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，为所述终端设备提供服务的网络设备，
    所述一个或多个网络设备的信息包括以下一项或多项：
    所述一个或多个网络设备的标识信息、所述终端设备在所述一个或多个网络设备的标识信息。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述一个或多个网络设备的信息包括所述一个或多个网络设备的标识信息，
    根据所述一个或多个网络设备的标识信息，确定所述N个第一网络设备包括所述第二网络设备。
  20. 根据权利要求18或19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标网络设备接收来自所述源网络设备的所述一个或多个网络设备的信息，包括：
    所述目标网络设备接收来自所述源网络设备的切换请求消息，所述切换请求消息中包括所述一个或多个网络设备的信息。
  21. 根据权利要求12至20中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述目标网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备，一个或多个网络设备源网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备；或者，
    所述目标网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备，所述源网络设备为载波聚合场景下的网络设备；或者，
    所述目标网络设备为载波聚合场景下的网络设备，所述源网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备。
  22. 一种数据传输的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    源网络设备确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括第二网络设备，
    其中，在所述终端设备从所述源网络设备切换至目标网络设备之前，所述第二网络设备属于为所述终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备的情况下，所述终端设备从所述源网络设备切换至所述目标网络设备之后，所述第二网络设备属于为所述终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，所述第二网络设备属于为所述终端设备提供服务的网络设备；或者，在所述终端设备从所述源网络设备切换至所述目标网络设备之后，所述第二网络设备属于为所述终端设备配置的基于条件的候选主辅小区PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备的情况下，所述终端设备从所述源网络设备切换至所述目标网络设备之前，所述第二网络设备属于为所述终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，所述第二网络设备属于为所述终端设备提供服务的网络设备；
    所述源网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示使用所述第二网络设备中与所述终端设备相关的信息。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法，其特征在于，所述与所述终端设备相关的信息，包括以下一项或多项：所述终端设备的上下文信息、已向所述第二网络设备传输的所述终端设备的数据包、所述第二网络设备可以丢弃的所述终端设备的数据包的信息。
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的方法，其特征在于，所述源网络设备确定切换后为终端设备配置的网络设备包括第二网络设备，包括：
    所述源网络设备接收来自所述目标网络设备的所述第二网络设备的标识信息；
    根据所述第二网络设备的标识信息，所述源网络设备确定切换后为所述终端设备配置的网络设备包括所述第二网络设备。
  25. 根据权利要求22至24中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述源网络设备向所述目标网络设备发送所述第二网络设备的早期数据传输的信息。
  26. 根据权利要求22至25中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述源网络设备向所述目标网络设备发送一个或多个网络设备的信息，其中，所述一个或多个网络设备包括所述第二网络设备，所述一个或多个网络设备为：所述终端设备从所述源网络设备切换至所述目标网络设备之前，为所述终端设备配置的基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的候选网络设备，或者，为所述终端设备提供服务的网络设备，
    所述一个或多个网络设备的信息包括以下一项或多项：
    所述一个或多个网络设备的标识信息、所述终端设备在所述一个或多个网络设备的标识信息。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述源网络设备向所述目标网络设备发送一个或多个网络设备的信息，包括：
    所述源网络设备向所述目标网络设备发送切换请求消息，所述切换请求消息中包括所述一个或多个网络设备的信息。
  28. 根据权利要求22至27中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述源网络设备向所述目标网络设备或者所述第二网络设备发送待向所述终端设备发送的数据包。
  29. 根据权利要求22至28中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述目标网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备，所述源网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备；或者，
    所述目标网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备，所述源网络设备为载波聚合场景下的网络设备；或者，
    所述目标网络设备为载波聚合场景下的网络设备，所述源网络设备为基于条件的候选PSCell增加或改变场景下的网络设备。
  30. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，包括：所述计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序；所述计算机程序由一个或多个处理器执行时，使得包括所述处理器的装置执行如权利要求1-29中任一项所述的方法。
  31. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，实现权利要求1-29中任一项所述的方法。
  32. 一种通信系统，其特征在于，包括：
    权利要求12-29中任一项所述的目标网络设备和源网络设备；或者，
    权利要求12-29中任一项所述的目标网络设备、源网络设备、以及第二网络设备。
PCT/CN2021/072005 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 数据传输的方法和装置 Ceased WO2022151306A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202180068156.1A CN116250282A (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 数据传输的方法和装置
PCT/CN2021/072005 WO2022151306A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 数据传输的方法和装置
JP2023543100A JP7626494B2 (ja) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 データ伝送方法及び装置
KR1020237027224A KR20230129527A (ko) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 데이터 전송 방법 및 장치
EP21918514.7A EP4266746A4 (en) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DEVICE
US18/352,770 US20230362750A1 (en) 2021-01-15 2023-07-14 Data transmission method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2021/072005 WO2022151306A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 数据传输的方法和装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/352,770 Continuation US20230362750A1 (en) 2021-01-15 2023-07-14 Data transmission method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022151306A1 true WO2022151306A1 (zh) 2022-07-21

Family

ID=82446763

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/072005 Ceased WO2022151306A1 (zh) 2021-01-15 2021-01-15 数据传输的方法和装置

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (1) US20230362750A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4266746A4 (zh)
JP (1) JP7626494B2 (zh)
KR (1) KR20230129527A (zh)
CN (1) CN116250282A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022151306A1 (zh)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20240121683A1 (en) * 2022-10-10 2024-04-11 Nokia Technologies Oy Upf based transmision of user data for selective activation to selective activation candidate nodes
WO2024088641A1 (en) * 2022-10-25 2024-05-02 Nokia Technologies Oy Master node device and secondary node device
EP4366380A1 (en) * 2022-11-01 2024-05-08 Nokia Technologies Oy Use of estimated arrival probability-related information to select target secondary nodes for early data forwarding for dual connectivity wireless communications
WO2025023778A1 (en) * 2023-07-26 2025-01-30 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Node and user equipment in wireless communication system and method performed by the same
WO2025068420A1 (en) * 2023-09-29 2025-04-03 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Lossless path switching involving sidelink relays

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022231214A1 (ko) * 2021-04-28 2022-11-03 주식회사 케이티 이동성 제어 방법 및 그 장치
CN115707040B (zh) * 2021-08-02 2025-06-24 中国电信股份有限公司 数据传输方法、装置、设备及存储介质
EP4440195A1 (en) * 2023-03-29 2024-10-02 Nokia Technologies Oy Methods, apparatuses and systems for pscell measurement activation during nr-dc

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190223073A1 (en) * 2018-01-12 2019-07-18 FG Innovation Company Limited Conditional handover procedures
CN110166266A (zh) * 2018-02-12 2019-08-23 电信科学技术研究院有限公司 一种从节点配置更新的处理方法、主节点及从节点
CN110519777A (zh) * 2019-08-08 2019-11-29 武汉虹信通信技术有限责任公司 一种双连接下主服务小区变更方法、主节点及辅节点
CN112187414A (zh) * 2019-07-04 2021-01-05 华为技术有限公司 指示数据传输情况的方法和装置

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9497299B2 (en) * 2014-09-18 2016-11-15 Blackberry Limited Configuring a discard timer
EP3777317A1 (en) * 2018-04-05 2021-02-17 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Measurement gap communication
EP4154590B1 (en) * 2020-05-21 2023-11-22 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) Methods and apparatuses for early data forwarding in conditional handover of a ue in multi-connectivity
US11985557B2 (en) * 2020-10-12 2024-05-14 Qualcomm Incorporated Signaling for conditional primary secondary cell addition/change configuration

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190223073A1 (en) * 2018-01-12 2019-07-18 FG Innovation Company Limited Conditional handover procedures
CN110166266A (zh) * 2018-02-12 2019-08-23 电信科学技术研究院有限公司 一种从节点配置更新的处理方法、主节点及从节点
CN112187414A (zh) * 2019-07-04 2021-01-05 华为技术有限公司 指示数据传输情况的方法和装置
CN110519777A (zh) * 2019-08-08 2019-11-29 武汉虹信通信技术有限责任公司 一种双连接下主服务小区变更方法、主节点及辅节点

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HUAWEI: "Discussion on Support of conditional PSCell change/addition", 3GPP DRAFT; R3-206344, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG3, no. E-meeting; 20201102 - 20201112, 23 October 2020 (2020-10-23), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051945810 *
See also references of EP4266746A4 *

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20240121683A1 (en) * 2022-10-10 2024-04-11 Nokia Technologies Oy Upf based transmision of user data for selective activation to selective activation candidate nodes
EP4354958A1 (en) * 2022-10-10 2024-04-17 Nokia Technologies Oy Upf based transmision of user data for selective activation of candidate nodes
WO2024088641A1 (en) * 2022-10-25 2024-05-02 Nokia Technologies Oy Master node device and secondary node device
EP4366380A1 (en) * 2022-11-01 2024-05-08 Nokia Technologies Oy Use of estimated arrival probability-related information to select target secondary nodes for early data forwarding for dual connectivity wireless communications
WO2025023778A1 (en) * 2023-07-26 2025-01-30 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Node and user equipment in wireless communication system and method performed by the same
WO2025068420A1 (en) * 2023-09-29 2025-04-03 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Lossless path switching involving sidelink relays

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2024503709A (ja) 2024-01-26
CN116250282A8 (zh) 2024-05-31
EP4266746A4 (en) 2024-02-14
JP7626494B2 (ja) 2025-02-04
US20230362750A1 (en) 2023-11-09
KR20230129527A (ko) 2023-09-08
EP4266746A1 (en) 2023-10-25
CN116250282A (zh) 2023-06-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20240276289A1 (en) Data transmission method and data transmission apparatus
US11076334B2 (en) Data forwarding method, device, and communications system
US20230362750A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus
US10708968B2 (en) Method of controlling mobility of UE and apparatus therefor
CN111212459B (zh) 一种中继通信方法及装置
US20230009565A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus applied to multi-link device in wireless local area network
CN112312487B (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
US9247555B2 (en) Data transmission method, apparatus, and communications system
US20200112885A1 (en) Handover control method and apparatus
US20230012998A1 (en) Communication method, access network device, terminal device, and core network device
CN110892743B (zh) 用于使用户平面中断延迟最小化的方法和无线装置
US20230199600A1 (en) Method and communications apparatus for configuring assistance information
JP7700263B2 (ja) 通信方法および装置
CN110167063B (zh) 与基站处理一双连接的装置及方法
EP4535897A1 (en) Data transmission method, apparatus and system
CN108366398A (zh) 一种数据传输方法、网络设备及终端设备
CN116491166A (zh) 通信配置的方法和通信装置
JP7831608B2 (ja) 情報を送受信する方法、装置及び通信システム
CN111586767A (zh) 一种终端信息的通信处理方法和相关设备
WO2025030460A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备以及网络设备
WO2022027389A1 (en) Mechanism for cell identity management
EP3373694B1 (en) Communication device and method for handling communications in a dual connectivity
US20250048229A1 (en) Communication method and device
WO2021078170A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN120434727A (zh) 无线通信方法、终端设备以及网络设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21918514

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202180068156.1

Country of ref document: CN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202317048092

Country of ref document: IN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2023543100

Country of ref document: JP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021918514

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230721

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20237027224

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020237027224

Country of ref document: KR

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE